M1PJ 19A321 AA
2021 BRONCO SPORT Owner’s Manual
ford.ca
owner.ford.com
2021 BRONCO SPORT Owner’s Manual
August 2020
First Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
Vehicle shown with aermarket accessories.
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2020
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 202007 20200806192116
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................9
Symbols Glossary ............................................9
Data Recording .................................................11
Perchlorate .......................................................15
Ford Credit ........................................................15
Replacement Parts Recommendation
...........................................................................16
Special Notices ...............................................16
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................17
Export Unique Options ................................18
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................19
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ..........................................20
Child Safety
General Information ......................................21
Installing Child Restraints ..........................23
Booster Seats .................................................28
Child Restraint Positioning ........................30
Child Safety Locks .........................................32
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................34
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................35
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................37
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................38
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................38
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ..............................................40
Seatbelt Extensions .....................................40
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ ..........................41
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation .................................42
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................43
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........44
Side Airbags ....................................................46
Driver Knee Airbag .........................................47
Safety Canopy™ ...........................................48
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......49
Airbag Disposal .............................................50
911 Assist
What Is 911 Assist ...........................................51
Emergency Call Requirements .................51
Emergency Call Limitations ......................52
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................53
Remote Control .............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................58
MyKey™
Principle of Operation .................................59
Creating a MyKey ..........................................60
Clearing All MyKeys .......................................61
Checking MyKey System Status ...............61
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................62
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................62
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ...............................64
Keyless Entry ...................................................67
Liftgate
Opening the Liftgate ...................................69
Closing the Liftgate ......................................69
1
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
Window .........................................................70
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System .........................71
Anti-Theft Alarm .............................................71
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................73
Audio Control ..................................................73
Voice Control ...................................................74
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Lane
Centering ......................................................74
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ...........................................................74
Information Display Control ......................74
Horn ....................................................................74
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off ...................................................75
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................76
Autowipers .......................................................76
Windshield Washers .....................................77
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........78
Lighting
General Information .....................................79
Lighting Control .............................................79
Autolamps .......................................................80
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................80
Headlamp Exit Delay ..................................80
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
...........................................................................81
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ...........81
Front Fog Lamps ............................................81
Cornering Lamps ...........................................82
Direction Indicators ......................................83
Interior Lamps ................................................83
Ambient Lighting ..........................................84
Rear Floodlamps ...........................................84
Automatic High Beam Control
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................85
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off ...................................................85
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
..........................................................................85
Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................86
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................87
Global Opening and Closing ....................88
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................88
Interior Mirror ..................................................89
Sun Visors ........................................................89
Moonroof .........................................................90
Instrument Cluster
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
...........................................................................91
Gauges - Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
..........................................................................92
Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............94
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............97
Information Displays
General Information ....................................98
Personalized Settings ................................102
Information Messages ...............................103
Remote Start
What Is Remote Start ..................................117
Remote Start Precautions .........................117
Remote Start Limitations ..........................117
2
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Enabling Remote Start ...............................117
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle ...........................................................117
Extending the Remote Start Duration
..........................................................................117
Remote Start Remote Control Indicators
..........................................................................118
Remote Start Settings ................................118
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic
Temperature Control
(DATC)
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....120
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................120
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................120
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................120
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................120
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................120
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off ...................................................................121
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ..........................................................121
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
..........................................................................121
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ............121
Setting the Temperature ............................121
Directing the Flow of Air ............................122
Auto Mode ......................................................122
Climate Control – Troubleshooting ......123
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control
(EATC)
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....124
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................124
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................124
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................124
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................124
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................124
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off .................................................................125
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off .........................................................125
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.........................................................................125
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........125
Setting the Temperature ...........................125
Directing the Flow of Air ............................126
Auto Mode ......................................................126
Climate Control – Troubleshooting .......127
Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Manual Temperature
Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....128
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................128
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................128
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................128
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................128
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................128
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off .................................................................129
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ........................................................129
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........129
Setting the Temperature ..........................129
Directing the Flow of Air ............................129
Climate Control – Troubleshooting ......130
3
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter .......................131
Locating the Cabin Air Filter .....................131
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ...................131
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................132
Head Restraints ............................................132
Manual Seats ................................................135
Power Seats ..................................................136
Rear Seats .......................................................137
Heated Seats ................................................138
Rear Occupant Alert System
What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.........................................................................139
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work .............................................139
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.........................................................................139
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.........................................................................139
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off .................................................139
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
........................................................................140
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings ....................................................140
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
12V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ..........................141
Power Outlet Precautions .........................141
Locating the Power Outlet ........................141
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
110V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet .........................142
Power Outlet Precautions - 2.0L
EcoBoost™ ................................................142
Power Outlet Precautions - 1.5L
EcoBoost™ ................................................142
Locating the Power Outlet .......................142
Power Outlet Indicators ............................142
Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
.........................................................................143
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
.........................................................................143
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger
.........................................................................143
Charging a Wireless Device .....................143
Storage
Cup Holders ...................................................145
Under Seat Storage ....................................145
Glasses Holder .............................................145
Map Pocket ....................................................145
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ...................................147
Ignition Switch ..............................................147
Keyless Starting ............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................148
Engine Block Heater ...................................150
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop ...........................................152
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .....................................154
Fuel Quality ....................................................154
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................155
Running Out of Fuel ....................................155
Refueling .........................................................157
Fuel Consumption ......................................159
4
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law .................................................161
Catalytic Converter .....................................162
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ..........................165
Four-Wheel Drive
Principle of Operation ................................170
Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................170
Brakes
General Information ...................................174
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................174
Electric Parking Brake .................................175
Hill Start Assist .............................................176
Auto Hold .........................................................177
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ................................179
Using Traction Control ...............................179
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ...............................180
Using Stability Control ...............................181
Trail Control
What Is Trail Control ...................................182
Switching Trail Control On and Off .......182
Setting the Trail Control Speed ..............182
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................183
Trail Control Indicators ..............................183
Trail Control – Troubleshooting .............184
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ................................185
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................186
Rear View Camera .......................................187
180 Degree Camera ...................................190
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ...............................192
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
.........................................................................192
Setting the Cruise Control Speed ..........192
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................193
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................193
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................193
Adaptive Cruise Control
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work ..................................194
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Lane Centering .........................................194
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control ........................................................194
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
.........................................................................194
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
.........................................................................195
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off .........................................................197
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed ..........................................................198
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
........................................................................199
Canceling the Set Speed ........................200
Resuming the Set Speed ........................200
Overriding the Set Speed ........................200
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators ......200
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control ......................................201
Switching Lane Centering On and Off
.........................................................................201
Switching Intelligent Mode On and Off
........................................................................202
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance ......203
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting ......................................203
5
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................205
Lane Keeping System ...............................206
Blind Spot Information System .............210
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................212
Speed Sign Recognition ............................215
Steering ............................................................217
Pre-Collision Assist .....................................217
Drive Mode Control
What Is Drive Mode Control ....................222
Selecting a Drive Mode - 1.5L EcoBoost™
........................................................................222
Selecting a Drive Mode - 2.0L
EcoBoost™ ...............................................223
Drive Modes ..................................................223
Load Carrying
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ................225
Load Limit ......................................................225
Luggage Compartment
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Load Floor ...................................................231
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Divider ..........................................................231
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................233
Trailer Sway Control ..................................234
Recommended Towing Weights ..........234
Essential Towing Checks .........................235
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....238
Driving Hints
Off-Road Driving .........................................239
Breaking-In ....................................................246
Driving Economically .................................246
Floor Mats .....................................................246
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................248
Hazard Flashers ..........................................249
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................249
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................250
Post-Crash Alert System ..........................251
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................251
Towing Points ...............................................252
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............253
In California (U.S. Only) ...........................254
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................255
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................256
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................256
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
........................................................................258
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................258
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................258
Fuses
Fuse Box Locations ...................................260
Fuse Specification Chart .........................260
Changing a Fuse ..........................................267
Maintenance
General Information ..................................269
Opening and Closing the Hood .............269
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™
........................................................................270
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoost™
..........................................................................271
Engine Oil Dipstick ......................................272
Engine Oil Check ..........................................272
Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................273
Changing the Engine Air Filter ................274
6
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Engine Coolant Check ...............................275
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................279
Brake Fluid Check .......................................279
Power Steering Fluid Check ...................280
Changing the 12V Battery ........................280
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................282
Washer Fluid Check ...................................283
Fuel Filter .......................................................283
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................284
Changing the Front Wiper Blades ........284
Changing the Rear Wiper Blades .........284
Changing a Bulb ..........................................285
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................287
Cleaning Products ......................................287
Cleaning the Exterior .................................288
Waxing ............................................................289
Cleaning the Engine ..................................289
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
.......................................................................290
Cleaning the Interior ..................................290
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens .......................291
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............292
Cleaning the Wheels .................................292
Vehicle Storage ............................................292
Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................295
Tire Care .........................................................297
Using Snow Chains .....................................310
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........310
Changing a Road Wheel ...........................314
Technical Specifications ..........................320
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................321
Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................321
Vehicle Dimensions ....................................322
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™ .....323
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™ ......323
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................324
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
1.5L EcoBoost™ ......................................326
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.0L EcoBoost™ ......................................327
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™ .......329
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™ ......330
Fuel Tank Capacity ....................................330
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™ .........331
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™ .......332
Washer Fluid Specification .....................332
Brake Fluid Specification .........................333
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number ...............334
Connected Vehicle
What Is a Connected Vehicle .................335
Connected Vehicle Requirements ........335
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............335
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network - Vehicles With: Modem .....335
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network - Vehicles With: SYNC 3 ......335
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Vehicles With: Modem .........................336
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Vehicles With: SYNC 3 ..........................337
7
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........339
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password ................................339
Audio System
General Information ..................................340
Audio Unit .....................................................340
Digital Radio .................................................342
Satellite Radio .............................................344
USB Port .........................................................347
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................348
Using Voice Recognition ..........................350
Entertainment ..............................................357
Phone ..............................................................367
Navigation .....................................................368
Apps .................................................................374
Settings ..........................................................376
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................378
Accessories
Accessories ....................................................391
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................392
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......394
Normal Scheduled Maintenance ..........397
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ...........................................400
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............403
End User License Agreement ................406
Declaration of Conformity ........................431
Type Approvals ............................................432
8
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
9
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
10
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E272858
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
We respect your privacy and are
committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this publication
was correct at the time of going to print,
but as technology rapidly changes, we
recommend that you visit the regional Ford
website for the latest information.
11
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily
store data. This data could include
information on the condition and status of
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance
requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are
described in this section. Some of the data
recorded is stored in event logs or error
logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or
through a legal process. Such information
could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system
components, for example, fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example, wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
• Events or errors in essential systems,
for example, headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example, airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example,
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in
combination with other information, for
example, an accident report, damage to a
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
be associated with a specific person.
Service Data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, for example, your contact information,
to offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, you consent that certain
diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
12
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries.
Event Data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
event data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder.
Comfort, Convenience and
Entertainment Data
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have the ability to store data based
on your personalized settings. The data is
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
some of this data and also choose whether
to share it through the services to which
you subscribe. See Settings (page 376).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
13
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example, account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this
data through a dedicated, protected
connection. We only collect and use data
to enable your use of our services to which
you have subscribed, with your consent or
where permitted by law. For additional
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have
subscribed.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy
information for any services to which you
subscribe. We take no responsibility for
services that third parties provide.
Vehicles With a Modem (If Equipped)
The modem has a SIM. The
modem was enabled when your
vehicle was built and periodically
sends messages to stay connected to the
cell phone network, receive automatic
software updates and send vehicle-related
information to us, for example, diagnostic
information. These messages could
include information that identifies your
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
additional information, for example, cell
phone network tower identification. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
refer to your local Ford website.
Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
Connected Vehicle (page 335).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example, environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With SYNC
Mobile Device Data
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system. See Apps
(page 374).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes the vehicle identification number
of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial
number, odometer, enabled apps, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain it only as long as necessary to
provide the service, to troubleshoot, for
continuous improvement and to offer you
products and services that may be of
interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
14
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
enables more mobile features and efficient
operation. The profile contains, for
example, data from your phonebook, read
and unread text messages and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
master reset function to erase the stored
information. See Settings (page 376).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to your local Ford
website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
emergency services operators to provide
the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and
access to the online Account Manager tool,
visit www.ford.com/finance.
15
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty.
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts.
For additional information, refer to the
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, see your warranty guide that is
available online. For more information,
refer to our website and download your
copy of the warranty guide.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.
16
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of unapproved
aftermarket plug-in devices. The vehicle
Warranty will not cover damage caused
by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.
Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
package.
Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ambulance
Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
17
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
18
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
19
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E322781
Air vents.A
Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 83).B
Information display. See Information Displays (page 98).C
Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 76).D
Push button ignition switch. See Keyless Starting (page 147).E
Touchscreen display.F
Audio unit controls. See Audio System (page 340).G
Glove compartment.H
Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 120).I
Cruise controls. See Adaptive Cruise Control (page 194).J
Information display controls and audio controls. See Information Display
Control (page 74). See Audio Control (page 73).
K
Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 79).L
20
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on
probable child height, age and weight
thresholds, or on the minimum
requirements of the law. We recommend
that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly
install the child restraint in your vehicle
and that you consult your pediatrician to
make sure you have a child restraint
appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
area. Failure to properly restrain children
in child restraints made especially for
their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
21
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint
Type
Child Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild
Use a child restraint
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat backrest
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers
in the United States, Canada and
Mexico.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 44).
• When installing a rear facing child
restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
22
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Restraints
E142594
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the child
restraint , with the tongue between the
child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
23
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you did not
twist the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
24
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
25
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points: two lower anchors where
the seat backrest and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether
anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.
E316405
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seat backrest below the symbols as
shown. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outermost Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 in
(46 cm) apart. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child restraints (with
26
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints
When used in combination, you may attach
either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap
afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child
restraints include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child restraint and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E316413
Perform the following steps to install a
child restraint with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the seat. For the
outermost seating positions, route the
tether strap under the head restraint
and between the head restraint posts.
For the center seating positions, route
the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint. If needed, you can also
remove the head restraints.
27
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E305488
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol.
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
28
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
29
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
30
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
and warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
31
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint
Restraint
Type
Seatbelt
Only
Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
132).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, you cannot open
the rear doors from the inside.
32
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
E300933
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of
each rear door. You must set the child
safety lock separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child
lock on and counter clockwise to switch it
off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counter clockwise to switch
the child lock on and clockwise to switch
it off.
33
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always
be properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and
one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
belt under the arm. Never use a single
seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats
may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outermost
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and second row outermost
seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outermost passenger seating position.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
34
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate when a
Safety Canopy airbag deploys.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142590
35
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode is not available
on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in
a rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 21).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
36
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. Allow the belt to retract. As the
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seatbelt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and turn on the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
How to Extract Seatbelts in the
Rear Outermost Positions
Seatbelts in the rear outermost positions
can lock if you firmly return the seat
backrest to its upright position. You can
unlock the seatbelts using the following
procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The seatbelt should then unlock.
3. Return the seat backrest to its desired
upright position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position:
1. Grasp the seatbelt webbing at the top
of the seat backrest.
2. Pull the seatbelt webbing forward,
firmly.
3. After pulling the seatbelt forward,
allow the seatbelt to feed back into the
seatbelt retractor as much as possible.
If necessary, press the seat backrest
down to allow the seatbelt webbing to
retract further.
4. The seatbelt should then unlock.
5. If the seatbelt does not unlock, repeat
steps 1-3.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury in
a crash.
E87511
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
37
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the indicator chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic-
ator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
WARNING: The system will only
provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This system monitors all seating positions
and provides audio and graphic feedback.
E71880
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do
not fasten your seatbelt when
you switch the ignition on. The lamp and
tone turn off when you fasten your seatbelt
or about one minute has elapsed.
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front passenger. This lamp
illuminates and a warning tone sounds if
you or your front passenger do not fasten
the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle speed
exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). To deactivate
the warning, see Deactivating and
Activating the Belt-Minder Feature.
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do
not place large objects on the seat.
E206718
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
the number of seating positions
with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
when a seating position changes from
unfastened to fastened.
E331448
This warning displays and a tone sounds
if an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
buckle or it becomes unfastened.
38
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
Seatbelt Status
E281361
E274703
Seatbelt fastened.A
Seatbelt not fastened.B
Seatbelt recently unfastened.C
Fault.D
To view the seatbelt status, use the
information display controls on the
steering wheel.
Deactivating and Activating the
Seatbelt Reminder (Front Seats Only)
WARNING: While the system
allows you to deactivate it, this system
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this terminates the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the
procedure.
Make sure that:
• You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unbuckle the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lamp
turns on.
4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp
flashes for confirmation.
39
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
• This switches the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This switches the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 287).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
40
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Passenger seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning lamp and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicators.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
41
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
42
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
43
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled or not.
E327178
The indicators are on the center stack of
the instrument panel.
44
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system uses
passenger airbag status indicators that
illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on or off.
Note: The indicators briefly illuminate when
you first switch the ignition on to confirm
they are functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable the front passenger
frontal airbag under these conditions:
• The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.
Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
status off indicator illuminates and
stays lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status on
indicator illuminates, switch the vehicle
off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable the front passenger
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
status on indicator illuminates.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
is disabled, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to
detect that person and enables the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the passenger airbag status off
indicator remains illuminated even
after this, advise the person to ride in
the rear seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
Disabled
OFF: Illuminated
Empty
ON: Not illuminated
DisabledOFF: IlluminatedChild
45
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
ON: Not illuminated
Enabled
OFF: Not illuminated
Adult
ON: Illuminated
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit upright,
leaning against the seat backrest, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator is incorrect, check for
the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat.
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The listed conditions may cause the weight
of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions listed.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle in for service
immediately.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
not released by Ford Motor Company
could prevent the deployment of the
airbags and increase the risk of injuries
in a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
46
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of each front and rear seat backrest. In
certain sideways crashes or rollover events,
the side airbags will be inflated. The airbag
was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the
protection provided occupants in side
impact crashes.
E152533
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The rear side airbag
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat.
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests, as well as
side airbags inside of each outermost
rear seat backrest.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
49).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain
crash and occupant conditions, the driver’s
knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s
front airbag may not activate. As with front
and side airbags, it is important to be
properly seated and restrained to reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
E67017
Make sure the knee airbag is
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 49).
47
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
48
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of crash, the restraints control
module deploys the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
• The readiness light will not illuminate
immediately after you switch the
ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
• A series of five beeps is heard. The tone
pattern repeats periodically until the
problem, the light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The restraint system is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
conditions sufficient to cause the restraint
control module to deploy a safety device.
49
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that not all the safety devices
activate for all occupants in a crash does
not mean something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, type of crash,
belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The front airbags are designed to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The front seatbelt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers. The rear seatbelt
pretensioners are designed to activate
in frontal crashes and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
• The side airbags are designed to inflate
in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if your
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
• The Safety Canopy is designed to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if your vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
50
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that
can call for help if you’re in an accident. If
a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, by
visiting:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
During an emergency call, the system
transmits vehicle data to the emergency
service. See Data Recording (page 11).
EMERGENCY CALL
REQUIREMENTS
WARNING: Do not wait for 911
Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
five seconds of the crash, the system or
phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your
phone in a secure location in your vehicle
so it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
system will not dial for help which could
delay response time, potentially
increasing the risk of serious injury or
death after a crash.
51
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
911 Assist
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
EMERGENCY CALL
LIMITATIONS
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
911 is the emergency number.
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
52
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
911 Assist
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 53).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Use the key blade to start your vehicle, and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
53
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Passive Key (If Equipped)
E305198
Your remote control operates the power
locks and the remote start system. The
key must be in your vehicle to use the push
button start.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the passive key is inside your
vehicle.
Removable Key Blade
Your remote control also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
54
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E305199
Press the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
103).
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of remote control batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control operates normally.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a screwdriver in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
55
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Passive Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E305199
1. Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.
56
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the remote control and install the
key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
57
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote
controls can be purchased from your
authorized dealer. Your dealer can program
the transmitters to your vehicle.
58
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
able to turn the lane departure warning
feature off, but this feature turns back
on automatically with every new key
cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
59
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a
safe speed considering posted speed
limits and prevailing road conditions. The
driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off. When selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control (if your vehicle
has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the touchscreen to create a MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle has a
push-button start, place the remote
control into the backup slot. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
148).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu in the
touchscreen and then scroll through
the menus to change the settings of
your MyKey. From the MyKey menu,
select the option Create MyKey. See
Settings (page 376).
60
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
4. Press Yes if you want to create the key
as a MyKey. A confirmation message
appears on the screen.
5. Switch the ignition off.
You have successfully created a MyKey.
Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key.
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the touchscreen to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or the remote control you want to
program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See Settings
(page 376).
3. Follow the instructions in the
touchscreen.
The programmed restrictions apply when
you switch the vehicle off, open and close
the driver door and restart your vehicle with
the programmed key or remote control.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
need an admin key to change or clear your
MyKey settings. When you make any
changes to your MyKey settings, you change
the settings for every MyKey. You cannot
make individual changes to apply to specific
MyKeys.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the touchscreen.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the
touchscreen and then scroll through
the menus to begin clearing your
MyKey programming. See Settings
(page 376).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 376).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
61
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
you have deleted all MyKeys.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
148).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 60).
62
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
Potential causesCondition
· Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
148).
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
63
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Note: Always take your keys and lock all
doors when leaving your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E196954
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators flash.
To change between driver door or all door
unlock mode, with the ignition off, press
and hold both the lock and unlock buttons
on the remote control for three seconds to
change between driver door or all door
unlock mode. The direction indicators
flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. Driver door mode only
unlocks the driver door when you press the
unlock button once. All door mode unlocks
all doors when you press the unlock button
once. The unlocking mode applies to the
remote control, keyless entry keypad and
intelligent access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds
twice and the direction indicators do not
flash.
Opening a Rear Door from the
Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your Passive key is within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access
uses a sensor on the back of the door
handle for unlocking and a separate sensor
on the face of each door handle for locking.
64
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248555
With your Passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of
your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on
the back of the door handle for a brief
period and then pull on the door handle to
unlock, being careful to not touch the lock
sensor at the same time or pulling the door
handle too quickly. The intelligent access
system requires a brief delay to
authenticate your Passive key.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248556
With your Passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of
your vehicle, touch the outer door handle
lock sensor for approximately one second
to lock, being careful to not touch the
unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors lock then unlock and
the horn sounds twice if the key is still in
the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
• Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
• Pressing the lock button on the
transmitter even if the doors are not
closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Passive keys (If
Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your Passive key inside your
vehicle's passenger compartment or rear
cargo area. When you electronically lock
your vehicle with any door open, the
transmission is in park (P) and the ignition
is off, the system searches for an Passive
key inside your vehicle after you close the
last door. If the system finds a key, all of
the doors immediately unlock and the horn
sounds twice, indicating that a key is inside.
65
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if
the ignition is on.
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
4 mph (7 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
To enable or disable autounlock, see an
authorized dealer.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• After twenty-five seconds of
illumination.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• Twenty-five seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Passive keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
66
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and
then it lights up so you can see and touch
the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
Displaying the Master Access Code
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
E315884
2
1
1. Remove the rubber mat.
2. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the key.
5. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: You need to have two programmed
intelligent access keys for this procedure.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
Creating a Personal Entry Code Using
the Keypad
1. Enter the factory-set code
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
67
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must enter each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Entry Code Using
the Keypad
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Creating a Personal Entry Code Using
the Touchscreen
You can create or erase your own personal
entry code through the touchscreen
settings. See Settings (page 376).
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 64).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
68
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
OPENING THE LIFTGATE
Opening the Liftgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
E323752
Glass.A
Door.B
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
2. Press button B.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate Using the
Remote Control
E267940
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The liftgate
unlocks for 45 seconds, during
which time you can open the liftgate using
the outside control button.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
CLOSING THE LIFTGATE
Closing the Liftgate From Outside
Your Vehicle
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
69
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate,
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
E327259
Use the handles inside the liftgate to help
with closing.
Note: Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent cargo from falling out.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
LIFTGATE WINDOW
E323752
Glass.A
Door.B
1. Unlock the liftgate window with the
remote control or power door unlock
control. If an intelligent access key is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate, the
liftgate window unlocks when you
press the release button.
2. Press button A and then lift to open.
3. Carefully push the window down and
press firmly to latch securely.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate window in a garage or other
enclosed area to avoid damaging the glass.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate window
open while driving. This could damage the
liftgate window and its components.
70
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems could result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain could cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It helps to prevent anyone from
starting the engine without using a coded
key programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key could prevent the engine from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, there is a problem with
the system and a message could appear
in the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two
integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key (If Equipped)
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
71
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
The message indicator flashes
when theft protection is active.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
72
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 132).
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
E280796
E280795
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
E280802
Press to decrease volume level.
E280803
Press to increase volume level.
E268549
Press to silence the current
media
Press to access phone mode or
to answer a phone call.
E265040
Press to end a phone call.
73
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
E265045
Press to access the previous
media selection.
E265044
Press to access the next media
selection.
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E142599
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: LANE CENTERING
E280798
See Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On and Off (page 197). See Setting the
Adaptive Cruise Control Speed (page
198). See Setting the Adaptive Cruise
Control Gap (page 199).
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
E280796
See What Is Cruise Control (page 192).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E280795
See General Information (page 98).
HORN
E270945
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
to activate the horn.
74
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
SWITCHING THE HEATED
STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
To activate the heated steering
wheel, press the button on the
climate control unit.
On some vehicles, an indicator on the
button illuminates when the heated
steering wheel is on.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature
of the steering wheel.
75
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
E270969
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wipers.
E295996
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Intermittent Wipe
E295997
Shortest wipe interval.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Longest wipe interval.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
76
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
E295997
High sensitivity.A
Autowipers On.B
Low sensitivity.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers defaults to on and remains on
until you switch it off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E242323
E270967
Pull the lever toward you to
operate the windshield washers.
When you release the lever, the wipers
operate for a short time. When activated,
a courtesy wipe occurs a short time after
the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
off in the touchscreen. See Settings (page
376).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
77
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also turns
on the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
E242324
C
Intermittent wipe.A
Continuous wipe.B
Rear window wiper off.C
Depending on your vehicle, when you
switch on the front wipers and move the
gearshift lever to reverse (R), the rear
intermittent wipe may turn on.
Note: Make sure you switch the rear
window wiper off before entering a car
wash.
Rear Window Washer
E242432
Push the lever away from you to operate
the rear window washer. When you release
the lever, the wipers operate for a short
time.
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
78
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
Lighting Control Selections
E281337
Turn the dial to make a selection.
Note: The indicator illuminates next to the
active selection.
E265031
Lamps off.
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
E281240
Autolamps.
E270968
Headlamps on.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps every time you switch your
vehicle on.
Switching High Beam Headlamps
On and Off
E248603
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
79
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lighting
Flashing High Beam Headlamps
E248604
Pull the lever toward you and release it to
flash the high beam headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
light situations or when the wipers operate.
E281240
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your
vehicle on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the touchscreen to adjust the period of
time that the headlamps remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
E291299
E296433
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you again
or switching the ignition on.
80
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH:
CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the touchscreen:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
376).
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. You switch the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On
or Off
Only switch the front fog lamps on during
reduced visibility.
You can switch the front fog lamps on if
any of the following occur:
• You set the lighting control to the
parking lamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
headlamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position and the headlamps
are on.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control.
Press the button to switch the
front fog lamps on or off.
81
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lighting
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
CORNERING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
E72898
Headlamp beam.A
Cornering lamp beam.B
The cornering lamps illuminate the inside
of a corner when you are turning the
steering wheel.
82
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Switching the Direction Indicators
On and Off
E242676
Push the lever up or down to switch the
direction indicators on.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
Set the lever to the middle position to
switch the direction indicators off.
Direction Indicator
Flashes when you switch the
direction indicators on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed indicator bulb.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
On
Fully press the button on the
overhead console towards the
icon.
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off
Fully press the button on the
overhead console towards the
icon.
Interior Lamp Function
Switching the Interior Lamp Function
On
The switch is on the overhead console.
E299443
Set the switch to the middle position.
When you switch the interior lamp function
on, the interior lamps turn on if:
• You open a door.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition off.
Switching the Front Interior Lamps
On and Off
E249791
Press the edge of the lamp lens.
83
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lighting
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps
On and Off
Press the edge of the lamp lens.
Note: If the rear lamps are switched on
through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Select Vehicle.
Select Ambient Light.
E306304
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Drag the slider above zero brightness.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the slider left or right.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Drag the slider left to zero brightness.
REAR FLOODLAMPS
E336624
1. Open the liftgate or liftgate window.
2. Press the button on the left-hand side
of the cargo area to switch the rear
floodlamps on and off.
Note: The rear floodlamps turn off
approximately 45 minutes after you switch
them on.
Note: After the floodlamps time out twice,
you need to start your vehicle before you
can switch them on again.
Note: The rear floodlamps turn off when
you close the liftgate or liftgate window.
The rear floodlamps can be rotated to
direct light closer or further away from the
rear of the vehicle.
84
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Lighting
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns the high beams
off. Low beams remain on.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Lighting.
Activating the Automatic High
Beam Control
E281240
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See
Autolamps (page 80).
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your
vehicle on.
When active, the high beams turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
When active, the high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Note: High beam reactivation may be
delayed in certain curvy road situations.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS
The indicator illuminates to
confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
85
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic High Beam Control
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
E248603
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
86
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Automatic High Beam Control
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
Press the control to open the
window. Lift the control to close
the window.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
just one window is open, slightly open the
opposite window.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped)
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped)
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the door window.
Continue to hold the switch for a few
seconds after you close the window.
2. Release the window switch.
3. Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window.
4. Release the window switch.
5. Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the window.
6. Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and
one-touch up features.
Rear Window Lock
Press the control to lock or
unlock the rear window controls.
It illuminates when you lock the
rear window controls.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window stops and reverses if it detects
an obstruction.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Resetting Bounce-Back
WARNING: Bounce-back is off until
you reset the memory. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
If you have disconnected the battery, you
must reset the bounce-back memory
separately for each window.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch.
87
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
3. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds.
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds.
6. Release the switch.
7. Press and hold the switch until the
window is fully open.
8. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
9. Release the switch.
10. Open the window and then try to
close it using one-touch close.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window controls for
several minutes after switching off the
ignition or until opening either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the remote control to open
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 98).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the
lock or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E303926
Left-hand mirror.A
Right-hand mirror.B
88
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E303927
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the turn
signal.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 210).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Manual Dimming Mirror
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
89
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the moonroof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are
on the overhead console.
The Moonroof and sunscreen have a
one-touch open and close feature, press
the control all the way down and release.
To stop them during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E303933
Moonroof open. Press and
release to open the moonroof.
A
Moonroof vent or close. Press
and release to vent or close the
moonroof. When the glass is
closed, press to vent the
moonroof.
B
Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
closed.
C
Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
D
Bounce-Back
The moonroof stops when closing. It can
reverse some distance if there is an
obstacle in the way.
Press and hold the front of the control
within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override this function. When
bounce-back is active, the closing force
increases for each of the next three times
that you close the moonroof.
90
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN
4 Inch Display
E282227
Tachometer.A
Information display.B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Engine coolant temperature gauge.E
Information Display
Information that appears depends on your
vehicle settings. See General
Information (page 98).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
91
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 6.5 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN
E282067
Tachometer.A
Information bar.B
Speedometer.C
92
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge.D
Information display.E
Engine coolant temperature gauge.F
Information Bar
Displays information related to the
navigation, outside air temperature,
odometer and distance to empty.
Information Display
Displays information related to the
navigation, outside air temperature,
odometer and distance to empty.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods
of time.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
93
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
indicators display or are available.
Adaptive Cruise Control
E323440
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in. See How Does Adaptive Cruise
Control With Stop and Go Work (page
194).
On (white light): Illuminates when you
switch on the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
you engage the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you disengage the
speed control system.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a system
error. You continue to have the
normal braking (without ABS) unless the
brake system warning lamp also
illuminates. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Automatic High Beam Control
Illuminates when this feature is
on. See Switching Automatic
High Beam Control On and Off
(page 85).
Auto Hold Active
E323448
Illuminates when the system
holds your vehicle stationary.
Auto Hold Unavailable
E323449
Illuminates when the system is
on, but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Auto-Start-Stop
Illuminates when the engine
shuts down or in conjunction
with a message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a system error. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor
E323450
Illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with
a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 210).
94
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
illuminates when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates when you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Make sure
the parking brake is off. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible if the lamp continues to
illuminate.
Cruise Control
E71340
Illuminates when you switch this
feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard flasher. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb. See Changing a
Bulb (page 285).
Door Ajar
E323451
Illuminates when the ignition is
on and any door is not
completely closed.
Electric Park Brake
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
E325775
Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
system error. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 175).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
Illuminates when the engine or
motor coolant temperature is
high. Stop your vehicle as soon
as possible, switch your vehicle off and let
it cool. See Engine Coolant Check (page
275).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a system error.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 272).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
E71880
Illuminates and a tone sounds
to remind you to fasten your
seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 38).
95
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Fasten Rear Seatbelt
E206718
Illuminates and a tone sounds
to signal the rear seatbelts are
not fastened.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
there is a system error. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Front Fog Lamps
Illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E325774
Illuminates when the ignition is
on and the hood is not
completely closed.
Lamps On
Illuminates when you switch the
low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
Liftgate Ajar
E323454
Illuminates when the liftgate is
not completely closed.
Low Beam Warning
E325579
Illuminates when the low beam
headlamp bulb is not functioning
properly.
Low Fuel Level
E325771
Illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Powertrain Fault
E323455
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or a
4WD/AWD fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Rear Differential Lock
E325779
Illuminates when you lock the
rear differential.
96
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Service Engine Soon
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on prior to engine
start to check the bulb and to
indicate whether your vehicle is ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
system errors are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Catalytic Converter (page 162).
If it illuminates when the engine is running
this indicates a system error. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected an error
in the vehicle emission control system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Continuing to drive your vehicle
may cause reduced power or the engine
to stop. Failure to respond to the warning
lamp may cause component damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Stability Control
E323869
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
system error. During a system error the
system switches off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 181).
Stability Control Off
E323870
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It goes out when you
switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 181).
Trail Control
E318506
Illuminates when you switch trail
control on.
4WD Lock
E325580
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive is locked.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
97
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the quick action menu (QAM)
buttons on the right-hand side of the
steering wheel. The information display
provides the corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
A B C
E250032
Return button.A
OK button.B
Menu button.C
Return Button
Use the return button to go back or to exit.
OK Button
Use the OK button to make a selection.
You can also use it to scroll through a
menu.
Menu Button
Use the menu button on the main screen
to display the submenu.
4 Inch Display Menu
E204495
This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
Note: Some options could appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
98
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Trip Menu
Trip Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Select Your SettingReset Individual Values
Select Your SettingConfigure View
• Trip Odometer - Registers the distance traveled of individual journeys or the total
distance since the function was last reset.
• Trip Timer - Registers the elapsed time of individual journeys or the total time since
the function was last reset.
• Average Fuel - Indicates the average fuel consumption of individual journeys or the
average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.
• Average Speed - Indicates the average vehicle speed of individual journeys or the
average vehicle speed since the function was last reset.
• Distance to Empty - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on
the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not
only decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset your trip information.
MyView
MyView
Digital Speedometer
Fuel Economy
Trip/Audio
Calm Screen
Navigation
Navigation
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 348).
99
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Audio
Audio
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 348).
Phone
Phone
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 348).
Settings
Settings
Contains vehicle status information.
Select Your Setting.
Information
Select Your SettingLanguageDisplay
Measure unit
Temperature unit
Tire Pressure
Select Your SettingDriver Assistance
Select Your SettingOil LevelVehicle Maintenance
Oil Life
Brake Fluid Life
Tire Pressure
MyKey InfoMyKey
Create MyKey
Note: Additional vehicle settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 376).
6 Inch Display Menu
E204495
This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
100
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Note: Some options could appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
Select Screens
Select Screens
Menu options covered in Personalized Settings. See Personalized Settings (page
102).
Audio
Audio
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 348).
Navigation
Navigation
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 348).
Phone
Phone
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 348).
Settings
Settings
Percent Oil Life Indication XXX%
Hold Ok to Reset
Oil Life
Hold Ok to ResetTire Monitor
Note: Additional vehicle settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 376).
101
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Display Setup
Display Setup
Speedometer km/h
Speedometer MPH
Note: Additional display settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 376).
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Select one of these options to display on
your main screen.
Note: Some options could appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Select Screens
Calm Screen
Fuel Economy
Trip 1
Trip 2
Tire Pressure
Intelligent 4WD
Off Road
Trailer Light Check
Seatbelts
Auto StartStop
Now Playing
After making your selection:
1. Select a setting and press the OK
button. This offers more information
on the feature.
2. Select fuel economy, trip 1 or trip 2 to
reset. Press and hold the OK button
for a few seconds.
Fuel Economy
An Instant Fuel Economy gauge is provided
along with average fuel economy. Average
fuel economy is continuously averaged
since the last reset.
102
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Note: When viewing this screen you can
reset your average fuel economy. Hold OK
to reset fuel history and average fuel
economy.
Trip 1 and 2
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
economy and total trip distance traveled.
For hybrid vehicles, the trip also shows the
distance traveled on electric power only.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Depending on your vehicle options and
instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
Note: The system abbreviates or shortens
certain messages.
E222314
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The system removes
other messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging.
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot properly
function.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Bad weather, ice, mud or water is causing poor radar visibility
and is blocking the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displays when automatic braking disables.Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise system reinstates control
to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
103
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off.
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on.
Traction Control On
Alarm
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 71).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Auto-Start-Stop
ActionMessage
You need to restart the engine and press
the brake pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine
You need to restart the engine and press
the brake pedal harder to start.
Auto StartStop Press Brake Harder to
Activate
You need to restart the engine and press
any pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start
Engine
Select neutral (N) for the system to restart
the engine.
Auto StartStop Select Neutral To Start
Engine
104
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Select park (P) for the system to restart
the engine.
Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart
Engine
The system is not functioning. You need to
restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required
Conditions are not met for the auto-start-
stop system to properly function.
Auto StartStop Not Available
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service
Soon
The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System Service
Now
The battery management system determines that the 12V
battery is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to charge
the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. This message clears once you restart your vehicle
and the battery state of charge recovers.
Battery State of Charge
Low
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge recovers.
Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows for a faster
battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
105
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A system error has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Blind Spot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
tion System (page 210).
Blind Spot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle and automatically applied the
brakes.
Cross Traffic Alert
Applying Brakes
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
212).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A system error has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Cross
Traffic Alert (page 212).
Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 210).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv-
ated Trailer Attached
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The driver door is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar
The passenger door is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar
The rear left door is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar
The rear right door is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar
106
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The liftgate or liftgate glass is not completely closed.Liftgate or liftglass ajar
The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
The factory keypad code appears in the information display
after the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 71).
Factory Keypad Code {X
X X X X}
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Four-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
The four-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating.
4WD Temporarily
Disabled
The four-wheel drive system is locking up the torque transfer
clutch to help reduce clutch temperature.
4WD Temporarily
Locked
The four-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare
tire.
4WD Off
The four-wheel drive system will resume normal function and
clear this message after driving a short distance with the road
tire re-installed or after the system cools.
4WD Restored
The four-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer.
4WD Fault Service
Required
Displays when the power transfer unit fluid requires service.Change 4WD Power
Transfer Unit Lube
107
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you have the power transfer unit fluid changed
and reset to new.
4WD Power Transfer
Unit Lube Set to New
The selected drive mode does not allow you to turn on the
rear differential lock feature.
Rear Differential Lock
Not Available in Current
Drive Mode
The selected drive mode requires your vehicle to be in four-
wheel drive.
4WD Lock Required in
Current Drive Mode
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.Fuel Door Opening
The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin
to refuel.
Fuel Door Open
A reminder to close the fuel door. Failure to follow this
instruction can cause the check engine light to illuminate.
Close Fuel Door to Avoid
""Check Engine"" Light
There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle.Refuel Error See Manual
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Hill Start Assist (page 176).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake when starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting
(page 147).
No Key Detected
108
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Appears when you need to press the Start Stop button to
shut off the engine when the system does not detect an
Intelligent Access key inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Full Accessory Power
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
programmed to the system.
Key Program Successful
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys
have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Key Program Failure
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys
Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
soon as possible.
Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Displays when the vehicle is switched off.Vehicle Switched Off
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the
steering wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
109
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be
inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 279).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over
Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
See Manual
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine
temperature.
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
The brake system has reduced stopping power.Brake Applied Power
Reduced
110
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
111
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Check Rear Park Aid
The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water
in front of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
See Rear Parking Aid (page 186).
Rear Park Aid Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water
in front of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
See Principle of Operation (page 185).
Park Aid Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed
exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued
driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
112
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system.
Wait 2 minutes before attempting to apply again.
Park Brake System
Overheated
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear
shift button to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
113
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available
when driving.
Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory {0} Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
To START Press Brake
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 310).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 310).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. For more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 310). If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
114
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
Trailer
ActionMessage
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 233).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 233).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 233).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
Transmission
ActionMessage
Displays when you switch the engine off and the transmission
is not in park (P). Shift into park (P).
Shift to Park
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you
drive.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.Press Brake Pedal
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over
Temperature Stop
Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
115
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized
dealer.
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical
after reconnecting or recharging the battery until you cycle
the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 280).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs
to be depressed before exiting the vehicle. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the
Vehicle
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault when the vehicle is
shifting to park. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
Displays when there is a system fault when the vehicle is
shifting to reverse. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive
Unavailable Select S for
Drive Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport
Unavailable Service
Required
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to
enable the transmission to shift from park.
Depress Brake to Shift
from Park
116
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Information Displays
WHAT IS REMOTE START
The system allows you to remotely start
your vehicle and to adjust the interior
temperature according to the settings that
you chose.
REMOTE START
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS
Remote start does not work under the
following conditions:
• The alarm horn is sounding.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The ignition is on.
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
Note: You can use remote start with
FordPass. See Connecting the Vehicle to
a Wi-Fi Network (page 335).
ENABLING REMOTE START
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Switch System on.
Note: To use remote start, make sure that
the modem is enabled. See Connected
Vehicle (page 335).
REMOTELY STARTING AND
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
Remotely Starting the Vehicle
E138623
Press the button on the remote
control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button on the remote control.
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
Note: You can also use FordPass to start
the vehicle.
Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice.
Note: The parking lamps turn on when the
vehicle is running.
Note: The horn sounds if the system fails
to start.
Note: All other vehicle systems remain off
when you have remotely started the vehicle.
Note: The vehicle remains secured when
you have remotely started the vehicle. A
valid key must be inside your vehicle to
switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle.
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle
E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button on the remote control.
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
EXTENDING THE REMOTE
START DURATION
To extend the remote start duration during
remote start, do the following:
117
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start (If Equipped)
E138623
Press the button on the remote
control.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button on the remote control.
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the
duration extends by another 15 minutes.
This provides a total of 30 minutes.
Note: Remote start can only be extended
once.
Note: A maximum of two remote starts, or
one remote start with an extension, are
allowed. To reset the restart procedure
switch the vehicle to on, then to off.
REMOTE START REMOTE
CONTROL INDICATORS
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful.
Solid green.
Remote stop
successful.
Solid red.
Request failed or
status not received.
Blinking red.
Status incomplete.Blinking green.
REMOTE START SETTINGS
Switching Climate Control Auto
Mode On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Remote Start Setup.
3. Press Climate Control.
4. Select Vehicle.
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the
system attempts to heat or cool the interior
to 72°F (22°C).
Note: When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the last
used settings.
Switching Climate Control Last
Settings On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Switch Last settings on.
Note: If you switch the last settings on, the
system remembers the last used settings.
Switching the Heated Seat
Settings On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Seats.
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the heated seat settings
on, the heated seats turn on during cold
weather.
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel Settings On and Off
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Seats and Steering Wheel.
118
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start (If Equipped)
5. Switch Auto on or off.
Note: If you switch the heated steering
wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel
turns on during cold weather.
Setting the Remote Start Duration
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Duration.
Note: Wait a few seconds before remotely
starting the vehicle after the vehicle stops
running.
119
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Remote Start (If Equipped)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E290005
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
the controls may look different from what
you see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be
prevented from turning on in all air flow
modes except maximum cooling to reduce
the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off
when you direct air to the instrument panel
or footwell air vents during hot weather to
improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air
conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
120
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)
SWITCHING THE HEATED
WIPER PARK ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the heated wiper
park also turns on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to
indicate the blower motor speed.
Note: When you switch the blower motor
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E244115
Turn the control on the left-hand side of
the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
121
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
E244097
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
Press the button.
AUTO MODE
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Note: When you switch auto mode on,
lights on the blower motor control do not
illuminate to indicate the blower motor
speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode
off.
Auto Mode Indicators
The indicators are on the Auto Mode
button.
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator
Status
The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
One indicator illumin-
ated.
The blower motor speed is moderate.Two indicators illumin-
ated.
The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
Three indicators illumin-
ated.
122
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)
Switching Dual Mode On and Off
E265280
Press the button.
CLIMATE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Climate Control – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why is the volume of air to the rear
passenger compartment limited ?
Objects may obstruct the air direction
to the rear passenger compartment.
Make sure objects have not been
placed under the front seats.
Why is the volume of air from the air
vents reduced?
The air intake area at the base of the
windshield could be obstructed. Make
sure the air intake area is free from any
snow, ice or leaves.
What are the recommended settings
for heating the interior?
Auto mode on and instrument panel
and side air vents fully open.
How can I quickly heat the interior?
Select the highest blower motor
speed, highest temperature and direct
the air to the footwell air vents.
What are the recommended settings
for cooling the interior?
Auto mode on.
How can I quickly cool the interior?
Switch maximum cooling on, switch
recirculated air on and drive with the
windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
How can I reduce the humidity build-up
inside my vehicle?
Do not drive with the system off or
with recirculated air on.
How can I defog the side windows?
Switch maximum defrost on.
How can I defog or clear the windshield
of thin ice?
Switch maximum defrost on.
Why do I feel air from the footwell air
vents regardless of the air
distribution?
This is normal operation. You may feel
a small amount of air from the
footwell air vents regardless of the air
distribution.
What happens if I switch auto mode on
when the outside temperature and
in-vehicle temperature is high?
The system temporarily selects
recirculated air to maximize cooling.
What happens if I switch auto mode on
when the outside temperature is low
and the engine is cold?
Air is directed to the windshield and
the outer instrument panel air vents.
123
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E289733
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
the controls may look different from what
you see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be
prevented from turning on in all air flow
modes except maximum cooling to reduce
the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off
when you direct air to the instrument panel
or footwell air vents during hot weather to
improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air
conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
124
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Electronic Automatic Temperature
Control (EATC)
SWITCHING THE HEATED
WIPER PARK ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the heated wiper
park also turns on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
E317606
Turn the control.
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to
indicate the blower motor speed.
Note: When you switch the blower motor
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E244106
125
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Electronic Automatic Temperature
Control (EATC)
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise for cooler temperature
settings.
Turn the temperature control clockwise
for warmer temperature settings.
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
E244097
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
Press the button.
AUTO MODE
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Note: When you switch auto mode on,
lights on the blower motor control do not
illuminate to indicate the blower motor
speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode
off.
Auto Mode Indicators
The indicators are on the Auto Mode
button.
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator
Status
The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
One indicator illumin-
ated.
The blower motor speed is moderate.Two indicators illumin-
ated.
The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
Three indicators illumin-
ated.
126
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Electronic Automatic Temperature
Control (EATC)
CLIMATE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Climate Control – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why is the volume of air to the rear
passenger compartment limited ?
Objects may obstruct the air direction
to the rear passenger compartment.
Make sure objects have not been
placed under the front seats.
Why is the volume of air from the air
vents reduced?
The air intake area at the base of the
windshield could be obstructed. Make
sure the air intake area is free from any
snow, ice or leaves.
What are the recommended settings
for heating the interior?
Auto mode on and instrument panel
and side air vents fully open.
How can I quickly heat the interior?
Select the highest blower motor
speed, highest temperature and direct
the air to the footwell air vents.
What are the recommended settings
for cooling the interior?
Auto mode on.
How can I quickly cool the interior?
Switch maximum cooling on, switch
recirculated air on and drive with the
windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
How can I reduce the humidity build-up
inside my vehicle?
Do not drive with the system off or
with recirculated air on.
How can I defog the side windows?
Switch maximum defrost on.
How can I defog or clear the windshield
of thin ice?
Switch maximum defrost on.
Why do I feel air from the footwell air
vents regardless of the air
distribution?
This is normal operation. You may feel
a small amount of air from the
footwell air vents regardless of the air
distribution.
What happens if I switch auto mode on
when the outside temperature and
in-vehicle temperature is high?
The system temporarily selects
recirculated air to maximize cooling.
What happens if I switch auto mode on
when the outside temperature is low
and the engine is cold?
Air is directed to the windshield and
the outer instrument panel air vents.
127
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Electronic Automatic Temperature
Control (EATC)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E290056
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
the controls may look different from what
you see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Press the button.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be
prevented from turning on in all air flow
modes except maximum cooling to reduce
the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off
when you direct air to the instrument panel
or footwell air vents during hot weather to
improve cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air
conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control
clockwise past the highest
setting to maximize defrosting.
Note: The temperature control springs back
to the highest setting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: When you switch maximum defrost
on, the heated windshield turns on.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise past the
lowest setting to maximize
cooling.
Note: The temperature control springs back
to the lowest setting.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
128
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
SWITCHING THE HEATED
WIPER PARK ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the heated wiper
park also turns on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
E317606
Turn the control.
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to
indicate the blower motor speed.
Note: When you switch the blower motor
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E244106
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise for cooler temperature
settings.
Turn the temperature control clockwise
for warmer temperature settings.
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Panel Air Vents
E244097
Press the button.
129
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Vents
Press the button.
CLIMATE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
Climate Control – Frequently
Asked Questions
Why is the volume of air to the rear
passenger compartment limited?
Objects may obstruct the air direction
to the rear passenger compartment.
Make sure objects have not been
placed under the front seats.
Why is the volume of air from the air
vents reduced?
The air intake area at the base of the
windshield could be obstructed. Make
sure the air intake area is free from any
snow, ice or leaves.
What are the recommended settings
for heating the interior?
A medium blower motor speed
selected and the air directed to the
footwell and windshield air vents.
How can I quickly heat the interior?
Select the highest blower motor
speed, highest temperature and direct
the air to the footwell air vents.
What are the recommended settings
for cooling the interior?
Air conditioning on, a medium blower
motor speed selected and air directed
to the footwell and windshield air
vents.
How can I quickly cool the interior?
Switch maximum cooling on, switch
recirculated air on and drive with the
windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
How can I reduce the humidity build-up
inside my vehicle?
Do not drive with the system off or
with recirculated air on.
How can I defog the side windows?
Switch maximum defrost on.
How can I defog or clear the windshield
of thin ice?
Switch maximum defrost on.
Why do I feel air from the footwell air
vents regardless of the air
distribution?
This is normal operation. You may feel
a small amount of air from the
footwell air vents regardless of the air
distribution.
130
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
LOCATING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR
FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 394).
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
131
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Interior Air Quality
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event
of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees
from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
132
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head
restraints for all passengers before you
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraints
E291139
The head restraints consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
E187325
The head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraints
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold button C.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
133
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting the Front Seat Head
Restraint (If Equipped)
The front head restraint tilts for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraint
E293091
The head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Fold button (if equipped).D
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold both C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.
134
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward.
E318290
Adjusting the Seat Height (If Equipped)
E293554
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E293558
135
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E298944
Adjusting the Seat Height (If Equipped)
E298771
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
E298773
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If
Equipped)
E298774
136
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
REAR SEATS
Folding the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or
in the folded position. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death in the event of a sudden
stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it
is occupied. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
E164098
1. Before folding the seat backrest, stow
the seatbelt in the stowage clip. This
prevents the seatbelt from getting
caught in the seat latch.
2. Fold the outermost head restraints and
pull the center head restraint up to the
first locked position. See Head
Restraints (page 132).
Note: If you have head restraints that do
not fold, move the front seats forward to
avoid interference between the front and
rear seats. This allows the rear seat backrest
to be properly folded.
E331353
3. Press the button at the top of the seat
backrest.
4. Push the seat backrest forward.
E336254
137
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
5. If you have folding head restraints,
make sure they do not interfere with
the seat cushion when folded. This
allows the seat backrest to be properly
stowed.
Unfolding the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
Pull the seat backrest up to unfold it. When
raising the seat backrest, make sure the
seat latch engages.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything
on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
138
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Seats
WHAT IS THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
The rear occupant alert system monitors
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check
for rear seat occupants when you switch
the ignition off.
HOW DOES THE REAR
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
WORK
The system monitors when rear doors have
been opened and closed to indicate the
potential presence of an occupant in the
rear seat.
A message displays in the information and
entertainment display screen and an
audible warning sounds when you switch
the ignition off after any of the following
conditions have been met:
• A rear door is opened or closed while
the ignition is on.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of a rear door opening and
closing.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed
or sounded.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The system does not detect the presence
of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
It monitors when rear doors are opened
and closed.
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
conditions are met.
Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
through a rear door.
Note: The audible warning does not sound
when the front door is opened before you
switch the ignition off.
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: When you switch the system off, a
message appears every six months as a
reminder that the system is off. You can
switch the system back on or leave it off.
Note: Performing a master reset causes the
system to switch on again.
139
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM INDICATORS
E325002
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
140
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices using
a 12 V outlet adapter.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
When you switch the vehicle on, you can
use the socket to power 12 V appliances
with a maximum current rating of 20 A. Do
not use the power point over the vehicle
capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse could
blow. Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points. This could result in damage
to vehicle systems. Do not hang any
accessory from the accessory plug. Always
keep the power point caps closed when
not in use. Do not insert objects other than
an accessory plug into the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
Power outlets are in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin below the
instrument panel.
• Inside the main center console bin.
• In the cargo area.
141
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices that
use a household plug.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 400 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and
could result in fire or serious injury.
LOCATING THE POWER
OUTLET
The power outlets are located on the rear
of the center console, and in the cargo
area.
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
The power outlet indicator illuminates to
let you know the status of the system.
DescriptionIndicator Status
The power point is
working and the
vehicle is on.
On
The power point is
off or the vehicle is
off
Off
The power point is
in fault mode.
Flashing
142
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 110V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
The wireless accessory charger allows you
to charge one compatible Qi wireless
charging device on the charging area.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we
recommend that you consult with your
physician.
Tests on this equipment show that it
complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. There is no
guarantee that the interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, please consult the dealer.
• This product is not end-user
serviceable.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
credit cards, near the charging area when
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
heat up and degrade the charging
performance, in addition to causing error
messages and interruptions in charging.
Note: During charging, the device and the
charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
battery gets hotter than usual, the device
may stop charging.
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
E297549
The charging area is on the
center console or in the media
bin below the instrument panel.
CHARGING A WIRELESS
DEVICE
Place the device on the center of the
charging surface with the charging side
down. The charging stops after your device
reaches a full charge.
143
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running, or when SYNC is on.
144
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
Cup Holder Precautions
WARNING: Use caution when
stowing items or hot drinks in the cup
holders. Items could become loose or
spill during hard braking, acceleration or
crashes. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE
Locating the Under Seat Storage
Compartment (If Equipped)
Rear Under Seat Storage
E317938
Push the latch and lift the seat cushion to
access the storage compartment.
Note: For proper operation, keep the under
seat storage rubber bin in place when the
vehicle is in motion.
GLASSES HOLDER
Locating the Glasses Holder
E324912
The glasses holder is in the overhead
console. Press near the rear edge of the
door to open.
MAP POCKET
Locating the Map Pocket
A zipper map pocket and strap system are
on the backs of the front seats.
145
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
E320180
B
A
Zipper map pocket.A.
Strap system.B.
Note: The recommended load for the
overall system should not exceed 5 lb
(2.268 kg).
146
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Storage
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.
Always open the garage door before you
start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E304650
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular phones
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
147
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E142555
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
and hold the button until the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start your vehicle.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch
until the engine starts.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
148
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E336652
1. Place the key in the middle of the tray
as shown.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start your vehicle after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the
following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
5. Turn the key to position III and wait
until the engine stops cranking.
6. Release the accelerator pedal.
7. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
automatically shuts down your vehicle if
it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting down. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
your vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for
example pressing the brake or
accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown any time the ignition is on
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 98).
• Pressing the OK or RESET button to
temporarily switch the feature off for
the current ignition cycle only.
149
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the key to the off position.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
150
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element, installed in the engine block and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, Do Not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do Not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
151
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while your vehicle is stopped.
The engine restarts when you release the
brake pedal. Your vehicle may restart in
some situations, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort
• To recharge the battery
Note: Power assist steering is turned off
when the engine is off.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The system may
require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
98).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system is enabled every time you start
your vehicle if the following conditions are
met:
• You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop
button.
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after the vehicle
initially starts.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in drive (D).
• The driver door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• The steering wheel is not being turned.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road
slope.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions, such as battery state of
charge and temperature in range.
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
• Your vehicle is not being driven at a
high altitude.
• The ambient temperature is moderate.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster illuminates to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster has a
grey Auto-Start-Stop indicator
light, it illuminates when
automatic engine stop is not available due
to one of the above noted conditions not
being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions results in
an automatic restart of the engine if:
• You remove your foot from the brake
pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver seatbelt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
152
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• You exceed the maximum engine off
time.
• You press the Auto-Start-Stop button
while the engine is stopped.
• The heated windshield is turned on.
Any of the following conditions could result
in an automatic restart of the engine if:
• The blower fan speed increases or the
climate control temperature changes.
• You plug in or switch on an electrical
accessory.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button on the
instrument panel to switch the system off.
The button illuminates. The system
deactivates for the current ignition cycle
only. Press the button again to restore the
Auto-Start-Stop function.
If your vehicle is in an Auto-Start-Stop
state and you shift the transmission to
reverse without pressing the brake, a
message appears telling you to press the
brake. Press the brake pedal within 60
seconds, or shift into park (P) and
manually restart your vehicle.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. Manually
restart your vehicle. See Information
Displays (page 98).
153
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
154
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 233).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
155
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open
or push open the capless fuel system
with foreign objects. This could damage
the fuel system and its seal and cause
injury to you or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 155).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
156
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when
the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
157
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E332233
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When the pump shuts off, wait 5
seconds then slightly raise the fuel
pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
fill the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage the
vehicle Warranty may not cover. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
158
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that could be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
155). This action should dislodge any
debris that could be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See Information Displays
(page 98).
The first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the vehicle. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000–3,000 mi (3,200–4,800 km).
1. Completely fill the fuel tank and record
the initial odometer reading. See
Refueling (page 157).
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving, for example city
or highway. This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions. Keeping
records during summer and winter shows
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions Influencing Fuel Efficiency
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle will reduce fuel efficiency.
• Avoid adding accessories that increase
aerodynamic drag to your vehicle such
as bug deflectors, car top carriers and
ski or bike racks.
• Remove empty roof racks and keep
windows shut at high speeds to reduce
wind resistance and fuel use.
159
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Check and adjust tire pressure
regularly. Under inflated tires will
increase fuel consumption.
• Sudden acceleration and braking
degrade fuel efficiency. Drive smoothly
looking as far ahead as possible and
avoid short trips when possible.
• Fuel efficiency degrades with lower
temperatures.
• Comfort Features use additional energy
and consume more fuel. Use AC and
other comfort features only when
necessary.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
increase fuel consumption.
160
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the
vehicle from the engine and exhaust
system heat and noise. On vehicles with
no original equipment floor covering
insulation, do not carry passengers in a
manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
161
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 250).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
162
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 157).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
163
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
164
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property
damage.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the remote control is inside
your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of Your Automatic Transmission
E322797
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission
shifter. The transmission selector is on the
center console, below the climate control
system.
To place the vehicle in gear from park (P):
1. Fully press and hold the brake pedal
when shifting out of park (P).
2. Rotate the outer ring of the
transmission selector clockwise from
park (P), until the desired gear
illuminates on the transmission
selector.
3. Release the brake pedal and the
transmission remains in the selected
gear.
The instrument cluster also displays the
current gear.
Park (P)
In park (P), power is not transmitted to the
driven wheels and the transmission is
locked. You can start the engine with the
transmission in this position.
165
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Transmission
Shift into park (P) only when your vehicle
is stationary.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Electric Parking Brake (page 175).
Reverse (R)
Shift into reverse (R) only when your
vehicle is stationary and the engine is at
idle speed
Neutral (N)
WARNING: In neutral (N) your
vehicle has the ability to roll freely. If you
intend to leave your vehicle, make sure
you apply the parking brake.
In neutral (N), power is not transmitted to
the driven wheels but the transmission is
not locked. You can start the engine with
the transmission in this position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy.
Manual (M) (If Equipped)
With your vehicle in drive (D), press the
manual (M) button to activate manual
mode.
In manual (M), you can upshift or
downshift using the paddle shifters.
Low(L)
With your vehicle in drive (D), press the low
(L) button to activate low mode.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• You can shift the transmission into low
(L) at any vehicle speed.
• Is not for use under extended or normal
driving conditions and results in lower
fuel economy.
SelectShift (If Equipped)
Use this feature to upshift or downshift
using the paddle shifters.
You can only use this feature in drive (D)
or manual (M).
E144821
Pull any paddle to switch the feature on.
Note: SelectShift in drive (D) provides
temporary manual control of the gear
selection.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (-) to downshift.
In manual (M), press the manual (M)
button to switch the feature off and return
to drive (D).
Automatic Return to park
Note: This feature does not operate when
your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
Your vehicle has a feature that shifts your
vehicle into park (P) when any of the
following conditions occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with your
seatbelt unlatched.
• You unlatch your seatbelt when the
driver door is open.
If you switch your vehicle off when moving,
the vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) until
it slows down enough to shift into park (P).
166
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Transmission
Note: If you have waited for more than two
minutes, before starting your vehicle,
unlatching your seatbelt causes this feature
to activate, even with the driver door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you open the driver door or the
indicator illuminates with the driver door
closed, see your authorized dealer.
Stay in Neutral Mode
Stay in neutral mode allows your vehicle
to stay in neutral when you exit your
vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Stay in neutral is a temporary vehicle
state with the ignition off. Once in this
mode, sufficient battery voltage must be
maintained or your vehicle returns to park.
Not maintaining sufficient battery voltage
could damage the battery not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Note: When entering an automatic car
wash, always shift to neutral (N). If you are
exiting the vehicle before the car wash, stay
in neutral mode is available.
To enter stay in neutral mode
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the Key ON with the engine
running, press and hold the brake
pedal.
3. Shift in neutral (N).
Note: When in neutral (N), a message
appears in the display screen informing you
how to access stay in neutral mode.
4. Press the manual (M), or low (L)
button in the middle of the
transmission selector to enter stay in
neutral mode.
Note: A message appears in the display
screen confirming your vehicle is in stay in
neutral mode. The neutral (N) indicator light
on the transmission selector slowly flashes.
5. Release the brake pedal.
6. Switch the ignition off.
To exit stay in neutral mode, place your
foot on the brake pedal and shift into park
(P), or start the engine and shift into drive
(D), or reverse (R).
Manual Park Release
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle until you verify that the
stoplamps are working.
Use the manual park release to move your
transmission from the park (P) position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or
emergency.
Activating the Manual Park Release
Cable
1. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 175).
Note: If the vehicle battery is dead, for
example, no electrical power is available,
you could use an external power to apply
the parking brake.
167
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Transmission
E307867
2. Locate the manual park release cable
access cover on the lower instrument
panel dash to the bottom left-hand
side of the steering column.
3. Using a tool or the key blade, carefully
open the access cover.
Note: Do not pull the tether until you are in
the driver seat.
4. Switch the ignition on, but do not start
your vehicle.
5. Once in the driver seat, fully press the
brake pedal and hold. Do not release.
Pull the orange tether towards the
driver seat until the tether gets locked
in the override position. Then leave the
tether.
6. If done correctly, a message on the
instrument cluster displays Park Not
Available, Transmission Not in Park, or
Shift System Fault.
Note: Your vehicle is now out of the park
(P) position and is free to roll.
7. With your foot still fully applied on the
brake pedal, disengage the parking
brake. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 175).
8. Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) for
emergency towing purposes.
9. Switch off the ignition.
10. Once safe to do so, and there is no
risk that your vehicle will roll,
disconnect the negative, black,
battery cable from the battery. If the
vehicle rolls before disconnecting the
battery, the electric parking brake
could apply. You may need to release
the parking brake again. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 175).
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal
Mode
1. Once it is safe to do so, reconnect the
negative, black, battery cable to the
battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 175).
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,
no electrical power is available, you could
use an external power to apply the parking
brake.
3. Fully apply the brake pedal and hold.
Do not release. Pull the orange tether
outward toward the driver seat to
release it from the override position.
4. The cable releases and retracts back
to its original rest position.
5. Stow the manual park release cable
tether back inside the instrument panel
dash hole, install the access cover by
pressing it back in position.
168
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Transmission
6. With your foot fully applied on the
brake pedal, start your vehicle. Confirm
that your vehicle is in the park (P)
position and that the instrument
cluster indicates park (P).
7. If the instrument cluster is not
displaying the park (P) position or a
message displays on the instrument
cluster screen, make sure you apply the
parking brake before exiting your
vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer
for service.
Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The system has detected a fault that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Transmission Malfunction Service Now
Displays when you shift into neutral (N).Select M To Confirm Stay In Neutral Mode
Displays when you shift into neutral (N).Select L to Confirm Stay in Neutral Mode
Displays to confirm that your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud
or Snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
rock it out by shifting between forward and
reverse gears, stopping between shifts in
a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires could occur, or the engine may
overheat.
169
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Transmission
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
This system is a proactive system. It has
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and
transfer torque to the front wheels before
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not
present, the system is continuously
adjusting to the torque distribution, in an
attempt to improve straight line and
cornering behavior, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on every
time you switch the ignition on.
If any component requires maintenance,
a message appears in the information
display.
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
E331897
A graphic displays in the information
display to advise you of the power
distribution between the front and rear
wheels. The more the area is filled, the
more power is being distributed to that
wheel.
Note: Four-wheel drive is also called 4WD
and 4x4.
Note: Do not use the four-wheel drive lock,
the rear differential lock or off-road
selectable drive modes on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. These features
are only intended for consistently slippery
or loose surfaces. Operating your vehicle
outside of these conditions could subject
the vehicle to excessive stress, which may
result in damage not covered under your
warranty. See Drive Mode Control (page
222).
Note: When a system malfunction is
present, a warning message is displayed in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 103). This means the
system is not functioning correctly and has
defaulted to front-wheel drive only. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: A message is displayed in the
information display if the system overheats
and switches to front-wheel drive. This
condition could occur if you operate your
vehicle in extreme high-load conditions or
with excessive wheel slip, for example deep
sand. To resume four-wheel drive function
as soon as possible, stop your vehicle in a
safe location and switch the ignition off for
a minimum of 10 minutes. After the system
cools, normal four-wheel drive functionality
resumes.
Note: If a warning message appears in the
information display when using the spare
tire, it turns off after reinstalling the repaired
or replaced road tire and you perform a key
cycle.
Note: It is recommended that you reinstall
the repaired tire or replace the tire as soon
as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes could
cause system damage or default the system
to front-wheel drive.
170
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
Driving in Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive
Four-wheel drive has operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from front-wheel drive, both on
and off the freeway.
When driving at slow speeds under
high-load conditions, use a low gear when
possible. Low gear operation maximizes
the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the air
conditioning may cycle on and off to
prevent the engine from overheating.
Note: It may be useful to select the most
appropriate drive mode to most effectively
maximize vehicle performance. See Drive
Mode Control (page 222).
Note: It may be useful to switch traction
control off. This allows for more wheel spin
and engine torque in certain conditions or if
your vehicle becomes stuck.
Note: If the front or rear axle is submerged
in water, check the rear axle lubricant and
power transfer unit lubricant and change if
necessary. See Driving Through Water
Limitations (page 244).
Basic Operating Principles
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel,
snow or ice, proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been
reduced, ease your vehicle back onto the
road. Do not turn the steering wheel
sharply while returning your vehicle to the
road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You could lose
control if you do not slow down or if you
turn the steering wheel too sharply or
abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control, or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others is your
primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency where a
sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle, for example, turn the steering
wheel only as rapidly and as far as required
to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering
can result in loss of vehicle control. Apply
smooth pressure to the accelerator pedal
or brake pedal when changes in vehicle
speed are required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle rollover, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another, for example, from
concrete to gravel, there will be a change
in the way your vehicle responds to a
maneuver, for example, steering,
acceleration or braking.
Note: For off-road driving,
171
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
Four-Wheel Drive Lock (If Equipped)
The four-wheel drive lock increases
four-wheel drive performance by
preventing the front and rear axles from
disconnecting. You can activate and
deactivate the four-wheel drive lock on the
fly by pressing the button on the drive
mode control. It also engages based on
certain selected drive modes. See What
Is Drive Mode Control (page 222).
Note: Using the four-wheel drive lock on
dry pavement can produce excessive noise,
and increase tire and vehicle wear.
Note: The four-wheel drive lock may be
required in some drive modes, preventing it
from being disabled.
E327288
This feature provides an
indicator light in the information
display when in use. While the
feature is in standby mode, the light
displays gray. While the feature is active,
the light becomes colored.
E327287
O
Rear Differential Lock (If Equipped)
The rear differential lock feature provides
additional traction should your vehicle
become stuck. You can activate and
deactivate the rear differential lock feature
while moving within the operating speed
range by pressing the button on the drive
mode control. The feature disengages
when the vehicle speed exceeds a set
value and it re-engages when the vehicle
speed goes below a set value. It also
engages based on certain selected drive
modes. See Selecting a Drive Mode
(page 222).
The rear differential lock feature is for use
in mud, rocks, sand or off-road conditions
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.
Note: This feature is for off-road use only
and is not for use on dry pavement. Using
the rear differential lock feature on dry
pavement can produce excessive noise, and
increase tire and vehicle wear. Operating
your vehicle in these conditions could
subject your vehicle to excessive stress,
which may result in damage not covered
under your warranty.
Note: This feature is not available in all
drive modes.
E163170
The rear differential lock
provides an indicator light in the
information display when in use.
While the feature is in standby mode, the
light displays gray. While the feature is
active, the light becomes colored.
172
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
O
E327290
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts, for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars, or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high-load or
device, for example, a ladder or luggage
racks. Any modifications to your vehicle
that raise the center of gravity could cause
your vehicle to roll over when there is a loss
of vehicle control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
could void the warranty, increase your
repair cost, reduce vehicle performance
and operational capabilities, and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off-road usage.
173
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings could be worn-out and have
your vehicle checked. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the
steering wheel while braking, have your
vehicle checked.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. Wet brakes result in reduced
braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car
wash or standing water to dry the brakes.
See Cleaning the Wheels (page 292).
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to have your vehicle checked.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
If the light does not momentarily
illuminate, continues to flash or
remains on when you switch the
ignition on, the anti-lock brake system
could be disabled. Have the system
checked. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
Brake Lamps
See Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 94).
E270480
If the light does not momentarily
illuminate, continues to flash or
remains on when you switch the
ignition on or apply the parking
brake, have the system checked.
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake released,
have the system checked immediately.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
174
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery is running out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console
or to the left-hand side of the steering
wheel, on the lower part of the instrument
panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
E267156
Pull the switch upward.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is
applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not
illuminate, the system has malfunctioned.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Transmission (page 165).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in
an Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
vehicle, you could cause damage to the
brake system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
E270480
The red warning lamp
illuminates, a tone sounds and
the stoplamps turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
the switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Push the switch downward.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
175
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine
has developed sufficient torque to prevent
your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull
away in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the
Electric Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away
in a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
electric parking brake has not released.
Manually release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake if the Vehicle Battery is
Running Out of Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of
charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle
(page 250).
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn
off if a malfunction is apparent or if you
rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
176
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on. You cannot
turn the system on or off.
AUTO HOLD
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system turns off if
there is a malfunction or if you
excessively rev the engine.
The system applies the brakes to hold your
vehicle at a standstill after you stop your
vehicle and release the brake pedal. This
could be beneficial in certain situations, for
example when waiting on a hill or in traffic.
Switching Auto Hold On and Off
E319161
Press the button on your console to access
auto hold on the touchscreen.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door, fasten your
seatbelt and start the engine.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
177
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
Make sure you switch the system off before
towing with your vehicle or before using an
automatic car wash.
Using Auto Hold
1. Use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a complete stop. The auto hold active
indicator illuminates in the information
display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
Note: The system only activates if you
apply enough brake pressure. If your vehicle
is on a steep slope, you need to press the
brake pedal harder before the system
activates.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
could apply the electric parking brake. The
brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
electric parking brake releases when you
press the accelerator pedal. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 175).
Note: If auto-start-stop turns off the
engine, auto hold remains active.
Note: The system deactivates if you shift
into reverse (R) and press the brake pedal.
3. Pull away in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes and the
auto hold active indicator turns off.
Auto Hold Indicator
The auto hold indicator
illuminates in the information
display when the system is on
and is either active or
unavailable.
Illuminates when the system is active. Your
vehicle remains stationary after you
release the brake pedal.
Illuminates when the system is on but
unavailable to hold your vehicle at a
standstill.
The system could be unavailable when any
of the following occur:
• During an active park assist maneuver.
• Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
• The driver door is open.
• You do not fasten your seatbelt.
• You shift into reverse (R) before the
system is active.
178
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and
traction control light illuminates steadily
if the system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 98).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Using the traction control switch on the
center console to turn this feature off or
on.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
179
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket
roof racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic
stability control system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers may
interfere with and adversely affect the
electronic stability control system. Install
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as
far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats
in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of
the electronic stability control system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the
laws of physics. It’s always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
180
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 179).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 179).
181
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Stability Control
WHAT IS TRAIL CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission
into park (P) for automatic transmission
or first gear for manual transmission.
Trail control lets you focus on steering
during low-speed and off-road use by
controlling your vehicle's acceleration and
braking.
You can use trail control under the
following speeds:
• 20 mph (32 km/h) in four-wheel drive
or four-wheel drive lock.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse (R).
You may hear a noise from the anti-lock
brake system pump motor when you use
the system. This is normal.
SWITCHING TRAIL CONTROL
ON AND OFF
E325578
Press the button located on the console.
The system switches off if you press the
button again or exceed 42 mph (68 km/h).
SETTING THE TRAIL CONTROL
SPEED
E318924
Note: The buttons are on the steering
wheel.
182
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trail Control (If Equipped)
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press the button to increase the
set current speed.
Press the button to decrease the
set current speed.
Note: The indicator changes color.
You can adjust the set speed in small or
large increments. Press the toggle button
upward or downward once to adjust the
set speed in small increments. Press and
hold the toggle button upward or
downward to adjust the set speed in large
increments.
You can also adjust the set speed by
braking.
Note: Pressing the brake pedal does not
switch off the system.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E318919
Press the button.
TRAIL CONTROL INDICATORS
E318506
183
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trail Control (If Equipped)
TRAIL CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
Trail Control – Information Messages
ActionMessage
You need to reduce your vehicle speed to use trail
control.
Reduce Speed To Enter Trail
Control
You need to release the park brake to use trail control.Trail Control Not Available with
Park Brake Applied
You need to switch off the trailer backup assist to use
trail control.
Trail Control Not Available
While Pro Trailer Backup
Assist™ Active
You successfully enabled trail control and can set a
speed with the Set + or SET- control.
Trail Control Enabled Use SET
Button to Set Speed
The system turns trail control off due to a system fault.
You must resume control.
Trail Control Off Driver Resume
Control
Displays when the system has turned off.Trail Control Off
Displays when a system fault is present. See the trail
control section in your owner's manual.
Trail Control Fault See Manual
You need to select drive (D), neutral (N), or reverse
(R) to use trail control.
Trail Control To Activate Select
Gear
You need to switch cruise control off to use trail
control.
Trail Control Not Available with
Cruise Control Active
You need to close the driver door to use trail control.Trail Control Not Available with
Driver Door Open
Due to some action from you, the system turned the
trail control propulsion system off. The vehicle will still
brake if descending a hill. You need to press trail
control to switch it back on.
Descent Control Now Active
Press Trail Control Switch To
Exit
184
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Trail Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system. This
may cause reduced performance or false
alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
Note: If your vehicle has MyKey™, the
sensing system cannot be switched off
when a MyKey™ is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 59).
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia and you leave it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may
be altered causing inaccurate measurement
of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when you connect a
trailer to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns you of obstacles
within a certain range of your vehicle. The
system turns on when you switch the
ignition on.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 98). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the
button. The system turns on when you
switch the ignition on.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 103).
185
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
The sensors are on the rear bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
When the parking aid system sounds a
tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this could
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example, large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the center of the rear
bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
E130178
The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display.
The system detects large objects when
you shift into reverse (R) and any of the
following occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed and an object is moving toward
your vehicle, for example, another
vehicle at low speed.
186
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
If your vehicle remains stationary for two
seconds the audible warning turns off. If
your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from the rear bumper, the audible
warning does not turn off.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E322352
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If the system does not detect an object,
the distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and visual
indication when your vehicle is moving and
the detected object is moving toward your
vehicle. When you stop your vehicle, the
audible warnings stop after two seconds.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
187
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
E142435
The camera is on the liftgate.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object, for
example, a trailer.
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
188
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Camera Guidelines
E306774
Active guidelines.A
Centerline.B
Fixed guideline: Green zone.C
Fixed guideline: Yellow zone.D
Fixed guideline: Red zone.E
Rear bumper.F
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change
the steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Upon a battery disconnect, the active
guidelines may not be functional until your
vehicle has been driven a short distance and
exceeds a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Selectable settings for this feature are
zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is with the zoom
off.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
189
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 98).
Obstacle Distance Indicator
E322352
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are on
and off.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is off.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P) while the delay mode is on, the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P) on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
• You enable the hand brake on vehicles
with manual transmission.
180 DEGREE CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The front camera
system still requires the driver to use it
in conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
E321541
190
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The front view camera is located in the
grille. The camera provides a video image
of the area in front of your vehicle.
Note: The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to your vehicle's orientation
or road condition.
Note: The front view camera switches off
if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h). You have to switch the system
back on by using the camera system button
once below the speed threshold.
Note: The front camera system will switch
on when you are in mud/ruts, rock crawl or
sand mode and your speed is less than
15 mph (24 km/h). If you exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h) the camera shuts off until your
vehicle speed is below 12 mph (20 km/h).
Using the System
The 180 degree camera system consists
of front and rear cameras. The system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Provides visibility during parking
maneuvers.
E321477
A
o
The camera system button is located on
the audio unit and allows you to enable
and disable front camera.
Note: The camera system may not operate
correctly if mud, water or debris obstructs
the camera's view. You can clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner or by using your front or rear washer.
See Wipers and Washers (page 76).
Camera Views
Press the camera icon on the touchscreen
to toggle between different views.
• Normal Rear View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle
when your vehicle is in reverse (R).
• Expanded Rear View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
is directly behind your vehicle when
your vehicle is in reverse (R).
• Normal Front View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front your
vehicle when your vehicle is in park (P),
neutral (N) or drive (D).
• Expanded Front View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
is directly in front your vehicle when
your vehicle is in park (P), neutral (N)
or drive (D).
191
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Parking Aids
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
Requirements
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
E71340
Press the button to put the
system in standby mode.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E71340
Press the button when in
standby mode or switch the
ignition off.
Note: When you switch cruise control off
the set speed clears.
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the toggle button upward
or downward to set the current
speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the toggle
button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold the toggle button upward
to accelerate. Release the button when
you have reached your preferred speed.
Press and release the toggle
button downward to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the toggle button
downward to decelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
192
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cruise Control
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E280804
Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
193
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Cruise Control
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
WORK
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go
uses radar and camera sensors to adjust
the speed of your vehicle to maintain a set
gap from the vehicle in front of you in the
same lane while following it to a complete
stop. You can also engage the system to
follow a vehicle in front of you and adjust
set speed while stopped.
WHAT IS ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
uses radar and camera sensors to help
keep your vehicle in the lane by applying
continuous assistance steering torque
input toward the lane center on highways.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally.
WHAT IS INTELLIGENT
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(IF EQUIPPED)
Intelligent adaptive cruise control
combines speed sign recognition with
adaptive cruise control to adjust the cruise
set speed to the speed limit detected by
the speed sign recognition system. For
example, if the speed sign recognition
system detects a 50 mph (80 km/h)
speed limit, the cruise set speed is updated
to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads
with intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: The system is not a
crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
194
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
When Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep
grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Lane Centering Precautions
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
precaution.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
if any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
Sensor Limitations
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
195
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar and
camera sensors. In some cases there
may be no warning or a delayed warning.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
E307893
The camera is mounted on the windshield
behind the interior mirror.
E321483
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control
– Information Messages (page 203).
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle image does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
196
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Detection issues can occur:
E71621
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone could change. This
could result in a missed or false vehicle
detection.
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
Lane Centering Limitations
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
limitation.
Lane Centering may not correctly operate
in any of the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least
one lane marking or when lanes merge
or split.
• You switch the direction indicator on.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Areas under construction or new
infrastructure.
• When modifications to the steering
system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
Note: The assistance steering torque is
limited and may not be sufficient for all
driving situations.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
may deviate from the center line.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 74).
197
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
E323440
Press the button to set the
system in standby mode.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E323440
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode, or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Automatic Cancellation or
Deactivation
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
The system may cancel and set the parking
brake if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
the driver door after you stop your
vehicle.
• Your vehicle is at a stop continuously
for more than three minutes.
The system may deactivate or prevent
activating when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
• The brake temperature is too high.
• There is a failure in the system or a
related system.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL SPEED
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the toggle button upward
or downward to set the current
speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E338558
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
from a Complete Stop
Press the toggle button upward
or downward while keeping the
brake pedal fully pressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Manually Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the toggle
button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments.
198
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Press and hold the toggle button upward
to increase the set speed in large
increments. Release the button when you
reach the speed you prefer.
Press and release the toggle
button downward to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the toggle button
downward to decrease the set speed in
large increments. Release the button when
you reach the speed you prefer.
You can also press the accelerator or brake
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer.
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to select the current speed as
the set speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed continuously displays in the
information display when the system is
active.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL GAP
E339110
Press the button to cycle
through the four gap settings.
E338558
The selected gap appears in the
instrument cluster display as shown by the
bars in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore, the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Gap DistanceGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain the gap setting.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small,
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow
down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap
distance from the vehicle in front of you.
The system only applies limited braking.
You can override the system by applying
the brakes.
199
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E280804
Press the button or tap the brake
pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than three seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle
to a complete stop and remains
stationary for more than three
seconds, press and release the button or
press the accelerator pedal to follow the
vehicle ahead.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon
does not appear in the instrument cluster
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E323440
Illuminates when you switch the
system on. The color of the
indicator changes to indicate the
system status.
White indicates the system is on but
inactive.
Green indicates the system is active and
the speed has been set.
Lane Centering Indicators
E262175
Illuminates when you switch
lane centering on. The color of
the indicator changes to indicate
the system status.
Gray indicates the system is on but
inactive.
200
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Green indicates the system is active and
applying assistance steering torque input
to keep your vehicle in the center of the
lane.
Amber indicates a system
auto-cancellation.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators (If Equipped)
E339108
A bracket appears around the set speed
and the detected speed limit sign in the
information display.
System Warnings
If the set speed is increased beyond the
speed limit or speed limit plus a positive
tolerance value, the set speed indicator
flashes.
The warning does not occur if:
• You override the set speed using the
accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed due to being on a downhill slope.
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assist..
3. Select Cruise Control.
4. Select Normal.
E71340
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic
braking remains active to maintain set
speed. The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
SWITCHING LANE CENTERING
ON AND OFF
The controls are on the steering wheel.
See Cruise Control (page 74).
E262175
Press the button.
The indicator appears in the information
display. When the system is on, the color
of the indicator changes to indicate the
system status. See Adaptive Cruise
Control Indicators (page 200).
Note: Adaptive cruise control must be on
before you can switch lane centering on.
201
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Activating Lane Centering
The system only activates when all of the
following occur:
• You have adaptive cruise control with
stop-and-go on.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel.
• The system detects both lane
markings.
Note: If it does not detect valid lane
markings, the system stays inactive until
valid markings are available.
You can override the system at any time
by steering your vehicle.
If you drive off-center within the lane, the
system sets and maintains that preferred
lane position. The system provides
continuous assistance steering torque
input toward the preferred position.
Note: The system can only set preferred
lane positions within the lane.
Note: If the system cancels, the preferred
position erases. On the next activation, the
system provides continuous assistance
steering torque input toward the lane center.
System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
When the system is active and detects no
steering activity for a certain period of time,
the system alerts you to put your hands on
the steering wheel. If you do not react to
the warnings the system cancels and slows
your vehicle down to idle speeds while
maintaining steering control.
The system also alerts you if your vehicle
crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
Note: The system may detect a light grip
or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
driving.
When an external condition cancels the
system, for example, no lane markings
available, a tone sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
If your vehicle starts to slow
down, you must contribute to
the steering control and press
and release the button to regain full
system performance.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too wide or too
narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings are crossed.
Note: The system disables until the next
key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to
driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
SWITCHING INTELLIGENT
MODE ON AND OFF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
376).
2. Select Driver Assist..
3. Select Cruise Control.
202
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Changing the Set Speed with
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
When intelligent mode is on, the system
adjusts the set speed to the speed limit
detected by the camera and the speed
limit information provided by the
navigation system.
Note: The set speed adjusts when the
system detects a different maximum speed
limit.
Note: The speed limit information provided
by the navigation map data may be
inaccurate or out of date.
Note: The system alerts you if the set speed
increases beyond the speed limit. See
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators (page
200).
If the system does not detect a speed limit,
the vehicle speed remains at the current
set speed.
You can override the set speed at any time.
You may need to override or cancel the
system in certain situations such as
inclement weather or if an incorrect speed
is set.
Note: The system may not detect and read
speed limit signs with conditional
information, for example, when a sign is
flashing, during specific time ranges, or
when children are present.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
may not adjust the vehicle speed until after
your vehicle passes the speed limit sign.
ADJUSTING THE SET SPEED
TOLERANCE (IF EQUIPPED)
You can set a permanent speed tolerance
that is above or below the detected speed
limit.
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assist.
3. Select Cruise Control.
4. Select Tolerance.
5. Use +and - to set the tolerance.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
– TROUBLESHOOTING
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Note: Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon
which cluster type you have.
ActionMessage
A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
203
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a
blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
not brake or react to traffic.
Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise is going to cancel and you
must take control.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise and there is no lead vehicle in range.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
Lane Centering Information Messages
ActionMessage
Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and
provide steering input.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Lane Centering Assist
Not Available
Adaptive cruise control must be on before lane centering can
be switched on.
For Lane Centering
Assist to work Turn On
Adaptive Cruise
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control Information Messages (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Intelligent Cruise Control
Speed Sign Recognition
Not Available
204
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
DRIVER ALERT
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If you have a blocked camera or
damaged windshield, the system may not
function.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle, unless
it detects a MyKey™.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
E249505
The system monitors your driving behavior
using various inputs including the front
camera sensor.
If the system detects reduced driving
alertness below a certain threshold, the
system alerts you using a tone and a
message in the information display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
selecting Settings, Driver Assist and then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system monitors your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
205
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
only appears for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning could be issued
which remains in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system runs in the background
and only issues a warning if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on
your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking or road
edge.
Note: When you select aid or alert + aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or
touch on the steering wheel as hands off
driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
206
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. In alert mode, the system provides
a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
In aid mode, the system provides steering
assistance by gently counter steering your
vehicle back into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined alert and aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates
the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out
of the lane markings.
Switching the System On and Off
E288067
Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.
Note: The on or off setting is stored until it
is manually changed, unless a MyKey is
detected. If the system detects a MyKey, it
defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
207
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Aid only – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E165517
Alert.A
Aid.B
Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the
vehicle, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
If your vehicle stays to one side of the lane
after the lane keeping aid corrects your
vehicle and then subsequently drifts out
of the lane again, the system only provides
an alert at the steering wheel.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
• Low.
• Normal.
• High.
System Display
E294544
When you switch the system on, an image
of lane markings appears in the
information display.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking images do not display.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status. These colors represent the
following:
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
208
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
White: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention on the indicated side.
Note: If your vehicle has lane centering
assist and the system is active, the walls
appear green instead of white.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available, line markings are gray, when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
209
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available, line markings are gray, when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
aid or aid + alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind
spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
E255695
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
210
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Blind Spot Information System
Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display. The alert
indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.
Switching the Blind Spot
Information System On and Off
1. Using the information display controls
on the steering wheel, select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assistance.
3. Switch Blind Spot on or off.
If you switch the system off, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
When you switch the system on or off, the
alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
Blind Spot Information System
Indicator
E249861
E249861
When the system detects a
vehicle, an alert indicator
illuminates in the exterior mirror
on the side the approaching vehicle is
coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.
If the system detects a fault, an indicator
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the information
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
211
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays if the blind spot information system sensors are
blocked.
Blind Spot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Blis Deactivated Trailer
Attached
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Blind Spot System Fault
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert
The system detects vehicles that approach
at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
212
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
213
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When
Trailer is Attached
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
blind spot information system with trailer
tow under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
in the information display.
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 210).
Switching the System On and Off
To switch the system on or off, adjust the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 98).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 376).
Note: The system turns on every time you
switch the ignition on. To permanently
switch the system off, contact an authorized
dealer.
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
E268294
When the system detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone
sounds, a warning lamp
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information
display to show which side the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
214
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the information
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you, even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION (IF
EQUIPPED)
Principle of Operation
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
The system is designed to detect speed
limit signs to inform you of the current
speed limit. Detected speed signs appear
in the information display. The sensor is
behind the interior mirror.
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
Note: Speed sign data provided by the
navigation system contains information
integrated to the data carrier release.
Note: The system may not detect all speed
signs and may incorrectly read signs.
215
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may not
correctly function.
Note: Always replace headlamp bulbs with
those specifically designed for your vehicle.
Other bulbs could reduce system
performance.
The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on and you cannot switch the
system off.
Using Speed Sign Recognition
Setting the System Speed Warning
You can set the system speed warning to
alert you when the vehicle speed exceeds
the speed limit recognized by the system
by a certain speed tolerance.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
System Display
E317824
When the system detects a speed limit
sign, the speed limit appears in the
information display.
Note: If your vehicle has a navigation
system, stored speed sign data could
influence the indicated speed limit value.
To switch the system speed warning on or
off, adjust the speed warning settings use
the touchscreen:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assistance.
3. Select Tolerance.
4. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
Information Messages
ActionMessage
The traffic sign data provided by the navig-
ation system is unavailable due to weak or
no signal. Wait for a short period of time for
the signal to improve. If the message
continues to appear, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See
Manual
216
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays
in the information display. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and
watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects
an error, you may not feel a difference in
the steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power-assisted steering system. There is
no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. You must adapt
your speed and driving behavior to reduced
steering assist. Extreme continuous
steering may increase the effort it takes
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent
internal overheating and permanent
damage to your steering system. If this
should occur, you will neither lose the
ability to steer the vehicle manually nor
will it cause permanent damage. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers will allow
the system to cool down and steering
assist will return to normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• An improperly inflated tire.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead
to a crash or personal injury.
217
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during
cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system cannot
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
The system is active at speeds above
3 mph (5 km/h) and pedestrian detection
is active at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system provides three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert.
2. Brake support.
3. Active braking.
E255268
Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake support: The system helps reduce
the impact speed by preparing the brakes
for rapid braking. Brake support does not
automatically apply the brakes. If you press
the brake pedal, the system could apply
additional braking up to maximum braking
force, even if you lightly press the brake
pedal.
Active braking: It activates if the system
determines that a collision is about to
occur. The system may help the driver
reduce impact damage or completely
avoid the crash.
Note: Brake support and active braking are
active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
If your vehicle is equipped with a radar
sensor, included with adaptive cruise
control, then brake support and active
braking are active up to the maximum speed
of your vehicle.
Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
you can reduce the alert sensitivity, though
we recommend using the highest sensitivity
setting where possible. Setting lower
sensitivity would lead to fewer and later
system warnings.
218
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system turns off when you
manually disable AdvanceTrac™.
Distance Indication and Alert (If
Equipped)
This feature provides the driver with a
graphical indication of the time gap to
other preceding vehicles traveling in the
same direction. The information display
screen shows one of the images that
follow.
E254791
Note: Distance indication and alert
deactivates and the images do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Time GapDistance GapImagesSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
0.6sec — 0.9sec
56–82 ft
(17–25 m)
YellowNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Evasive Steering Assist (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a
stationary vehicle or a vehicle traveling in
the same direction as your vehicle, the
system helps you steer around the vehicle.
The system only activates when all of the
following occur:
• The pre-collision assist system detects
a vehicle ahead and starts to apply
active braking.
• You turn the steering wheel in an
attempt to steer around the vehicle.
219
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
After you turn the steering wheel, the
system applies additional steering torque
to help you steer around the vehicle. After
you pass the vehicle, the system applies
steering torque in the opposite direction to
encourage you to steer back into the lane.
The system deactivates after you fully pass
the vehicle.
Note: The system does not automatically
steer around a vehicle. If you do not turn the
steering wheel, the system does not
activate.
Note: The system does not activate if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small
and a crash cannot be avoided.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
Depending on your vehicle options, the
pre-collision assist settings may be in the
following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 98).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 376).
You can adjust the following settings:
• Change alert and distance alert
sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• Switch distance indication and alert on
or off.
• If required, switch active braking on or
off.
• If required, switch evasive steering
assist on or off.
Note: Active braking and evasive steering
assist turn on every time you switch the
ignition on.
Note: If you switch active braking off,
evasive steering assist turns off.
Blocked Sensors
E325781
Camera.1
Radar sensor (if equipped).2
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. If your vehicle is equipped
with a radar sensor, it is behind the fascia
cover in the center of the lower grille. With
a blocked sensor or camera, the
pre-collision assist system may not
operate or performance may reduce. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for when this message displays.
220
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Camera Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display screen.
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
screen.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactiv-
ates a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactiv-
ates a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve.
Swirling water, snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Have the radar checked for proper coverage
and operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front-
end impact.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
is equipped with a radar sensor, the radar
sensing zone may change. This could cause
missed or false detections. Have the radar
checked for proper coverage and operation.
221
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Aids
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE
CONTROL
Drive mode control delivers a driving
experience through a suite of sophisticated
electronic vehicle systems. These systems
optimize steering, handling and powertrain
response in the selected mode. The drive
mode control provides a single location to
control performance settings for multiple
systems.
Note: Drive modes are selected by using
the Goes Over Any-type of Terrain G.O.A.T.
MODES controller.
Changing the drive mode changes the
functionality of the following:
• Electric power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based
on the mode you select. See Steering
(page 217).
• Electronic stability control and traction
control assist your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving. See Stability Control (page
180).
• Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your driving
inputs.
• Engine sounds change based on each
mode.
• Transmission controls become
optimized with shift schedules tuned
to each mode.
• Four-wheel drive settings are optimized
and tuned to each mode.
The system tailors your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select.
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. If a mode is unavailable
due to a system fault, the mode defaults to
Normal.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE -
1.5L ECOBOOST™
E339228
To select a drive mode, use the console
mounted G.O.A.T. MODES controller.
Note: Drive mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off.
Note: Selected drive mode displays in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 103).
222
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE -
2.0L ECOBOOST™
E339229
To select a drive mode, use the console
mounted G.O.A.T. MODES controller.
Note: Drive mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off.
Note: Button icon shown may vary from
your vehicle.
Note: Selected drive mode displays in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 103).
DRIVE MODES
Eco
E295413
For efficient driving. This mode
helps deliver maximum fuel
efficiency and helps to increase
driving range.
Mud/Ruts (If Equipped)
E296606
For off-road driving. This mode
enhances vehicle performance
to traverse muddy, rutted or
uneven terrains. Mud/ruts mode engages
the four-wheel drive lock.
Note: The front camera system switches
on when you are in mud/ruts mode and your
speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h). If you
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h), the camera shuts
off until your vehicle speed is below 12 mph
(20 km/h). You can switch the camera off
using the button on the audio unit.
Note: This mode may help get your vehicle
unstuck from deep snow or sand.
Note: Using mud/ruts mode on dry, hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire and vehicle wear.
Normal
E317283
For everyday driving. This mode
is a balance of excitement,
comfort and convenience. This
is the default mode after each ignition
cycle.
Rock Crawl (If Equipped)
E322413
For off-road driving. For
optimum rock-climbing ability.
Rock crawl mode engages the
four-wheel drive lock and the rear
differential lock feature. Rock crawl mode
optimizes the throttle and transmission
response to provide you additional control
of your vehicle.
223
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Note: The front camera system switches
on when you are in rock crawl mode and
your speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h).
If you exceed 15 mph (24 km/h), the camera
shuts off until your vehicle speed is below
12 mph (20 km/h). You can switch the
camera off using the button on the audio
unit.
Note: This mode may help get your vehicle
unstuck from deep snow or sand.
Note: Using rock crawl mode on normal
pavement could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire and vehicle wear.
Sand
E332185
Sand mode is for off-road driving
on soft, dry sand or deep snow.
Sand mode engages the
four-wheel drive lock.
Note: The front camera system switches
on when you are in sand mode and your
speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h). If you
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h), the camera shuts
off until your vehicle speed is below 12 mph
(20 km/h). You can switch the camera off
using the button on the audio unit.
Note: Using sand mode on dry, hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, potential excessive tire
wear and vehicle wear.
Note: Sand mode is not intended for use
on firm, slippery surfaces, such as paved
roads covered with snow or ice or driving on
packed snow. For slippery, firm surfaces use
Slippery mode.
Slippery
E295414
For less than ideal road
conditions such as snow or ice
covered roads. This mode can
be used for crossing terrain where a firm
surface is covered with loose, wet or
slippery material. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting
for slippery surfaces.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving
on dry pavement. This could cause driveline
bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 170).
Sport
E246593
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling and
response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal response and provides
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
system holds onto lower gears longer,
helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
224
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Drive Mode Control
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as maintain
a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles,
with higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
For correct roof rack system operation,
directly place loads on crossbars affixed
to the roof rack side rails. When using the
roof rack system, we recommend you use
our genuine accessory crossbars designed
specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Note: Do not place loads directly on the
roof panel. The roof panel is not designed
to directly carry a load.
Maximum Roof Load Amounts
Note: The maximum roof load is based on
the load being evenly distributed on the
crossbars.
Maximum Roof LoadWeight on Crossbar (Total)
100 lb (45 kg)Vehicles with Panoramic Roof
150 lb (68 kg)Vehicles without Panoramic Roof
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
225
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E335959
Payload
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
226
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
227
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
228
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
229
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
230
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Load Carrying
ADJUSTING THE LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT LOAD FLOOR
E334915
Flat load floor.A
Angled load floor.B
The load floor can be adjusted to a higher
position to provide a fully flat load area
when the rear seats are folded.
ADJUSTING THE LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT DIVIDER (IF
EQUIPPED)
Full Shelf Position
E322931
1. Slide the luggage compartment divider
onto the tracks on each side of the
vehicle.
2. Align the triangles on the latches and
turn to lock the shelf into place.
Note: Do not use the shelf as a seat.
Note: Maximum weight for the shelf is 29 lb
(13 kg).
Note: Store or fold the shelf when the full
shelf is not being used.
Folded Shelf Position
E322933
Fold the luggage compartment divider.
Note: The luggage compartment divider
must be locked in place in the full shelf
position before folding.
Note: Do not use the shelf as a seat.
Note: Maximum weight for the shelf is 29 lb
(13 kg).
Note: We recommend using this position
to avoid noise when driving when the shelf
is empty.
Table Position
E322932
1. Slide the luggage compartment divider
to the first locking position.
2. Align the triangles and turn the latches
to lock into place.
3. Pull the table legs down and lock into
place on the bumper.
Note: The full shelf must be locked in the
first locking position before the table legs
are deployed.
231
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Luggage Compartment
Note: Maximum weight for the table is 29 lb
(13 kg).
Divider Position
E322934
Forward divider position.A
Rear divider position.B
Fold the divider and insert into the divider
slots.
Storage Position
E322935
Store the luggage compartment divider
behind the rear seat.
232
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Luggage Compartment
TOWING A TRAILER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
Note: See Recommended
Towing Weights (page 234).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 260).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
capacity. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
225).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
233
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant
trailer towing experience, and can control
trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 103). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
225).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the following
chart.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
frontal area for your vehicle
configuration listed in the following
chart.
Note: Your vehicle could have
reduced performance when
operating at high altitudes, and
when heavily loaded or towing a
trailer. When driving at elevation,
to match driving performance as
perceived at sea level, reduce gross
vehicle weight and gross
combination weight by 2% per
1,000 ft (300 m) of elevation.
234
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’ s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum
Trailer Frontal
Area
Maximum
Trailer Weight
Maximum
Gross
Combined
Weight Ratio
Powertrain
20 ft² (1.86 m²)2,000 lb
(907 kg)
5,860 lb
(2,658 kg)
1.5L EcoBoost
20 ft² (1.86 m²)2,200 lb
(997 kg)
6,260 lb
(2,839 kg)
2.0L EcoBoost
Calculated with SAE J2807
method.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 225).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
235
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing
Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)
E168683
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Note: Install the water proof protection cap
back onto the trailer towing connector
whenever it is not in use. This helps to
prevent water damage and trailer towing
connector malfunction.
Note: You cannot use a seven-pin trailer
wiring connector for your vehicle and the
trailer lighting equipment.
FunctionColor
Left direction indicator
and stop lamp
Yellow
Ground (-)White
Right direction indicator
and stop lamp
Green
Running lightsBrown
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’ s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
236
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
237
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the
ignition is in the accessory or on position
when being towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies or a vehicle
transport trailer, it can be flat-towed with
all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission configuration,
under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Refer to the Manual Park Release
procedure. See Automatic
Transmission (page 165). Failing to
do so could result in damage to the
transmission.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s
configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
Recreational Towing - Front-Wheel
Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. Place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Recreational Towing - Rear-Wheel
Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. We recommend towing your vehicle
with all four wheels off the ground, such
as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
your vehicle.
Recreational Towing - All-Wheel
and Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles (If
Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. We recommend towing your vehicle
with all four wheels off the ground, such
as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
your vehicle.
238
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Towing
OFF-ROAD DRIVING
What Is Off-Road Driving
Off-road driving is driving your vehicle on
unsurfaced roads or trails, made from dirt,
rocks, sand and mud.
Your vehicle has been designed and
equipped to explore those places where
the road cannot take you, whether you
choose a forest trail or the open desert.
Off-Road Driving Precautions
WARNING: If you continue to drive
your vehicle when the engine is
overheating, the engine could stop
without warning. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle.
Before going off-road, consult with your
local governmental agencies to determine
designated off-road trails and recreation
areas. Also, be sure to understand any
off-road vehicle registration requirements
for the area in which you plan on driving.
Tread Lightly is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nation’s wilderness areas. The U.S.
Forest Service and Bureau of Land
Management is encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other
public and private lands by treading lightly.
Before taking your vehicle off-road, do a
basic vehicle inspection to make sure that
the vehicle is in top working condition.
Before you venture off road, have a clear
mental picture of the underside of your
vehicle. Learn the location of any low
hanging items and any skid plates that may
be on the vehicle. You can avoid snagging
them on rocks and other obstacles if you
know where they are.
Memorizing some basic dimensions helps
you confidently deal with off-road
obstacles. Get to know your vehicle’s
height and width, its lowest point, its
wading depth and angles. Familiarize
yourself with your vehicle’s on-board
technology features.
We recommend driving at least two
vehicles when driving off-road. The buddy
system helps make sure that help is close
at hand should a vehicle become stuck or
damaged.
We recommend taking supplies such as a
first aid kit, supply of water, tow strap and
cell or satellite phone with you any time
you plan an off-road excursion.
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques
Grip the steering wheel with your thumbs
on the outside of the rim. This reduces the
risk of injury due to abrupt steering wheel
motions that occur when negotiating rough
terrain.
Control your throttle, brake and steering
inputs in a smooth manner. Sudden inputs
to the controls can cause a loss of traction
for the vehicle, especially when on sloped
terrain or crossing obstacles such as rocks
or logs.
239
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Look ahead on your route noting upcoming
obstacles, surface texture or color changes
or any other factors which may indicate a
change in available traction. Adjust the
vehicle speed and route to avoid a loss in
traction. Conditions can change causing
the course to vary day to day. Mark
obstacles with GPS markers to avoid
potential vehicle damage. Where
necessary, get out of your vehicle and
check the terrain.
When driving off-road, if the front or rear
suspension is bottoming-out or excessive
contact with the skid-plates is happening,
reduce the vehicle's speed to avoid
potential damage to your vehicle.
If you are driving in a dusty area, be sure to
leave ample distance between your vehicle
and any other vehicles to allow for
adequate vision.
When driving off-road verify that your
wipers and washers are working properly
and reduce your speed for better visibility.
When driving in desert conditions, we
recommend driving with your headlamps
on to help other drivers easily see you.
When convoying with other vehicles, we
recommend that communication is used,
and the lead vehicle notify other vehicles
of upcoming obstacles.
Keep available ground clearance in mind
and pick a route that minimizes the risk of
catching the underside of the vehicle on
an obstacle.
When negotiating low speed obstacles,
applying light brake pressure in conjunction
with the throttle allows you to negotiate
the obstacle in a more controlled manner.
Driving off-road requires a high amount of
concentration. Even if your local law does
not prohibit drinking alcohol when driving
off-road we do not recommend it.
Driving Off-Road
Driving In Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
allow for longer stopping distances and
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death.
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle. If
your vehicle slides when driving on snowy
or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the
direction of the slide until you regain
control. Avoid sudden applications of
power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Slowly and steadily apply
the accelerator when starting from a full
stop. Avoid sudden braking.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between your vehicle and other vehicles
for stopping.
In emergency stopping situations, do not
pump the brake pedal, apply the brake
firmly.
240
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Driving In Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Drive through the terrain without varying
vehicle speed. Apply the accelerator and
avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high ambient temperatures, use low
(L) mode, or shift to a lower gear when
possible. Select Low (L) mode or select a
lower gear to maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability. See
Transmission (page 165).
Use the vehicle's momentum to maintain
forward motion in sand. Avoid coming to
a stop on steep sand slopes as the vehicle
may not be able to continue forward after
it has stopped.
Driving In Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud.
Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose
traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: The vehicle brakes are less effective
when wet or muddy.
Driving Over Rocks and Gravel
Gravel is a constantly changing, low-grip
surface. Driving at slow speeds on gravel
reduces the risk of losing traction when you
stop, accelerate or turn a corner.
When approaching large rocks, position
the vehicle so that the tires pass over the
largest obstacle.
Note: Never attempt to straddle a rock that
is large enough to strike your axles or
undercarriage.
Note: Never attempt to drive over a rock
which is large enough to contact the door
sills.
If you lose traction on your wheels facing
uphill, stop and choose a more suitable
route.
Leave a generous gap between your
vehicle and other vehicles to minimize the
risk of damage from flying gravel. Avoid
dust clouds as they reduce visibility.
Before navigating on uneven ground,
secure anything inside the vehicle. If
possible, remove any roof-rack items. Use
the lowest gear possible and approach the
obstacle at a slow speed.
If your vehicle begins to slide down a slope,
steer downhill and gently apply the
throttle. If you lose traction on your uphill
wheels, stop immediately and choose a
more suitable route.
Approach logs, rocky steps or ditches
diagonally. Keep at least three wheels on
the ground at all times.
Climbing A Hill
WARNING: Extreme care should
be used when steering the vehicle in
reverse down a slope so as not to cause
the vehicle to swerve out of control.
Although natural obstacles can make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, try to drive straight
up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, first determine
the route you can use.
241
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear. This
reduces strain on the engine and the
possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause your
vehicle to roll over. It is better to reverse
back to a safe location.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other
side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
If the vehicle is unable to make it up the
hill, do not attempt to turn back down the
slope.
Apply the accelerator just enough for the
wheels to climb the hill.
Note: Too much acceleration can cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Descending A Hill:
• Use the same gear you would use to
climb the hill.
• Do not descend in neutral.
• Disengage overdrive.
• Avoid sudden and excessive braking.
Note: The front wheels have to be turning
in order to steer your vehicle.
When descending a steep hill in a manual
transmission vehicle do not leave the
vehicle in gear with the clutch depressed.
This could cause damage to your driveline.
Driving Through Water
WARNING: Do not attempt to
cross a deep, fast flowing body of water.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
As the water depth increases, you must
reduce your vehicle speed to avoid
potential vehicle damage.
The key to a safe crossing is the water
depth, current and bottom of the water's
condition. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
sinks in, effectively increasing the water
level on the vehicle. Make sure to consider
this when determining the depth of water.
Determine the depth and speed of the
current before attempting a water crossing.
Be aware that obstacles and debris may
be beneath the water’s surface.
Note: Cross flowing water at an angle
heading slightly upstream.
Note: You should tread lightly and avoid
damage to the environment.
Drive slow when crossing water. Proceed
with a constant slow speed lightly pressing
on the accelerator.
Drive through the water very slowly when
entering, then build up momentum. Keep
your vehicle moving at a steady pace.
Note: Do not try to accelerate through the
water crossing.
When driving too fast in water or through
deep water, the engine, transmission,
transfer case, axles, electrical components
or vehicle interior could ingest water. Water
can cause permanent damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
See Driving Through Water Limitations
(page 244).
Note: Failure to follow the recommended
speeds can result in vehicle damage.
Never stop or shut a vehicle off when
crossing deep water unless your vehicle
ingested water into the engine air intake.
If the engine stalls, do not attempt to
restart it.
242
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Ease off the accelerator as you reach the
other side to diminish the front wave. Apply
the accelerator slowly and as necessary
to climb out of the other side.
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling
system effectiveness by depositing debris
into the radiator.
Extra care must be taken crossing any type
of water. Do not drive into water unless
necessary. You should only drive through
areas that are designated and approved.
High currents even in shallow water can
wash the dirt out from around your tires or
push your vehicle across slippery rocks or
surfaces.
Never attempt to cross flowing water that
is deeper than your vehicles ground
clearance. Even in low currents your
vehicles body surface area can be pushed
downstream and out of control.
Do not cross any body of water that is fast
flowing and rising, wait for the flow rate to
reduce.
Determine exit points that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
If there are other vehicles ahead, wait until
they’ve left the water. Unsettled water can
make a safe passage more challenging.
Know your vehicle’s abilities and be able
to recover it if something goes wrong.
Keep the doors fully closed during a water
crossing.
Vehicles used to traverse water regularly
should be periodically inspected for signs
of water ingestion in all of the vehicle's
fluids. If water is found inside your vehicle
fluids, service your vehicle or see an
authorized dealer.
After driving through water and as soon as
it is safe to do so, check the brakes, horn,
lights, and steering wheel to make sure
everything is still in working order.
Avoid Getting High-Centered
Always keep available ground clearance
in mind and pick a route that minimizes the
risk of catching the underside of the vehicle
on an obstacle and getting high-centered.
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Recovery hooks are mounted to the
vehicle's structure and are used to pull out
the vehicle from a surface or location when
stuck. Recover your vehicle using various
towing apparatus attached to your
recovery hook such as winch, open hook,
or strap.
Note: Do not use recovery hooks to
recreationally tow your vehicle. See Towing
the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 238).
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If you are unable to free your vehicle call
roadside assistance. See Roadside
Assistance (page 248).
243
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch,
Washout Or Rut
Review the path ahead before attempting
to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle
from outside the vehicle for an
understanding of the terrain condition in
front of and behind the obstacle. Approach
obstacles slowly and inch the vehicle over.
Ditches and washouts should be crossed
at a 45 degree angle when possible.
Driving Over Logs
Review the path ahead before attempting
to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle
from outside the vehicle for an
understanding of the terrain condition in
front of and behind the obstacle.
Approach obstacles slowly and inch the
vehicle over, approaching at a 15 degree
angle.
Note: It is best to have a front tire on top of
the log when the other begins to climb over.
If a large obstacle near the log such as a
rock cannot be avoided, choose a path that
places the rock directly under the tire
rather than the undercarriage of the
vehicle. This helps prevent damage to the
vehicle.
Driving Through Water Limitations
Maximum Wading
Depth
Model
17.7 in (450 mm)Base
23.6 in (600 mm)Badlands
When you are driving though water do not
exceed 4 mph (7 km/h).
Off-Road Driving Aids
Selecting an Off-Road Drive Mode
Using the appropriate drive mode increases
your vehicle's control. See What Is Drive
Mode Control (page 222).
Using the Cameras Off-Road
Use the 180 degree camera to enhance
your off-road experience. See 180 Degree
Camera (page 190).
Using Four-Wheel Drive Lock
Increases four wheel drive performance by
preventing the front and rear axles from
disconnecting. You can activate and
deactivate the four wheel drive lock on the
fly. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
170).
Using Rear Differential Lock
The rear differential lock provides
additional traction to your vehicle when
stuck.
You can activate and deactivate the rear
differential lock on the fly within the
operating speed range.
The rear differential locker disengages
when the vehicle speed exceeds a set
value and it re-engages when the vehicle
speed goes below a set value. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 170).
Using Trail Control
The system works in a similar manner to
cruise control in off-road conditions. Trail
Control provides you the ability to
maneuver the vehicle without using the
throttle and brake pedals.
244
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Trail Control allows you to set a speed
between 1 mph (1.6 km/h) to 14 mph
(23 km/h) in a forward motion and 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) to 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse.
The system controls acceleration and
braking in difficult off-road environments,
which allows you to focus on steering. See
What Is Trail Control (page 182).
Trail Control Performance:
• Manages wheel slip to maximize
traction.
• Removes the need for you to use both
feet when driving in off-road situations.
• Provides braking to maximize traction
in descents.
• Gives you confidence in difficult
environments.
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-
Road
WARNING: After off-road use,
before returning to the road, check the
wheels and tires for damage. Off-road
use may cause damage to your wheels
and tires that can lead to tire failure, loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Driving off-road places more stress on your
vehicle than most on-road driving. After
driving off-road, check for damage to the
wheels, chassis and underbody.
Inspect the underbody of your vehicle by
checking tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for
damage.
Inspect the tires for any cuts in the tread
or sidewall area. Also inspect the sidewall
for any bulge indicating damage to the tire.
Make sure that tires are inflated to proper
tire pressure as indicated on the tire
placard.
Check the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as needed.
Check that the air filter is clean and dry.
Remove accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard or hide
damage to the fuel lines, brake hoses, and
propeller shafts.
Make sure that the grille and radiator are
clear of any obstructions that may affect
cooling.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, inspect
the wipers and washers to make sure they
are working.
Note: Mud caked windows are hard to see
through and can damage wiper blades or
motor.
Check wipers for debris or anything that
may scratch the windshield.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause vibrations
when driving and wheel imbalance.
Remove the material to reduce the
vibration.
Note: If you have removed the impacted
material from the wheels and your vehicle
still has a vibration check your vehicle for
damage or see an authorized dealer.
Inspect the exhaust system for damage or
looseness.
Make sure that the brakes are in proper
working order and free of any mud, stones
and debris, which can become trapped
around the brake rotor, backing plate and
caliper.
Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks, or
other damage.
245
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any are
loose or damaged, tighten or replace
ensuring that the proper torque
specification is used.
Inspect for torn or punctured boots on ball
joints, half shafts, steering gears.
Refit the front license plate if removed
previously.
BREAKING-IN
Tires
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Brakes and Clutch
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch
if possible for the first 100 mi (150 km) in
town and for the first 1,000 mi (1,500 km)
on freeways.
DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
The following helps to improve fuel
consumption:
• Regularly check your tire pressures and
make sure that they are inflated to the
correct pressure.
• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule and carry out the
recommended checks.
• Plan your journey and check the traffic
before you set off.
• Avoid idling the engine in cold weather
or for extended periods. Start the
engine only when you are ready to set
off.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
• Do not add unnecessary accessories
to the exterior of your vehicle, for
example running boards. If you use a
roof rack, remember to fold it down or
remove it when not in use.
• Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
anticipate the road ahead to avoid
heavy braking.
• Do not shift into neutral when you are
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
down.
• Shut all windows when driving at high
speeds.
• Switch off all electric systems when
not in use, for example air conditioning.
Make sure that you unplug any
accessories from the auxiliary power
points when not in use.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat
designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
246
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
247
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with
your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
248
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
249
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Note: Do not attempt to push-start an
automatic transmission vehicle. This could
cause transmission damage.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
To Connect the Booster Cables
4
2
1
3
E142664
Flat battery vehicle.1
Booster battery vehicle.2
Positive connection cable.3
Negative connection cable.4
WARNING: If the engine is running
while the hood is open, stay clear of
moving engine components. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
1. Switch off the engine and any electrical
equipment.
250
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
3. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to the ground point.
E318342
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
To Start the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on
when disconnecting the cables. The peak
voltage could blow the bulbs.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
251
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
Vehicle damage could occur if towed
incorrectly, or by any other means.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Your vehicle comes equipped with fixed
front recovery hooks. These hooks should
never have a load applied to them greater
than the gross vehicle weight rating of your
vehicle.
Note: When recovering your vehicle, we
recommend using both front hooks when
possible to minimize damage to the vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line within 10
degrees.
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
252
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-888-658-6805)
Website
www.ford.ca
Facebook
FordServiceCA (English)
FordServiceQC (Français)
Twitter
@FordServiceCA
253
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
254
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
255
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
256
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
257
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
258
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
259
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
E336053
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
The fuse box is below the glove
compartment.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
The engine compartment fuse box is in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
When you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 280).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
260
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
E292669
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Aftermarket auxiliary lighting.30 A1
Not used.—2
Windshield heated washer jets.10 A3
Supplemental heater.60 A4
Supplemental heater.40 A5
Supplemental heater.40 A6
Heated wiper park.20 A7
Not used.—8
Power inverter.60 A9
Starter motor.30 A10
261
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Powertrain control module.15 A11
Powertrain control module.15 A12
Powertrain control module.15 A13
Powertrain control module.15 A14
Not used.—15
Not used.—16
Not used.—17
Powertrain control module.10 A18
Anti-lock brake system module.10 A19
Data link connector.10 A20
Headlamp switch.5 A21
Amplifier.20 A22
Not used.—23
Not used.—24
Left-hand enhanced headlamps.25 A25
Right-hand enhanced headlamps.25 A26
Not used.—27
Not used.—28
Not used.—29
Electronic stability control.10 A30
Electronic power assist steering.5 A31
Body control module.30 A32
Front parking aid camera.10 A33
Rear view camera.
Blind spot information system.
Gear shift actuator.
Not used.—34
262
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Heated steering wheel.15 A35
Not used.—36
Horn.20 A37
Blower motor.40 A38
Not used.—39
Brake on-off switch.10 A40
Amplifier.20 A41
Driver power seat.30 A42
Anti-lock brake system valves.40 A43
Trailer tow module.40 A44
Passenger power seat.30 A45
Not used.—46
Heated seats.20 A47
Not used.—48
Anti-lock brake system pump.60 A49
Cooling fan.60 A50
Moonroof.30 A51
USB smart charger.5 A52
Not used.—53
Not used.—54
Not used.—55
A/C clutch.10 A56
Flood light.5 A57
Not used.—58
Body control module.40 A59
USB smart charger.5 A60
263
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Auxiliary power point.20 A61
Not used.—62
Not used.—63
Not used.—64
Not used.—65
Not used.—66
Not used.—67
Not used.—68
Port fuel injectors.15 A69
Auxiliary power point.20 A70
Auxiliary power point.20 A71
Rear window wiper.20 A72
Not used.—73
Windshield wiper motor.30 A74
Heated exterior mirrors.10 A75
Heated rear window.30 A76
Not used.—77
Liftglass release.15 A78
Not used.—79
Fuel pump.20 A80
Rear window washer pump.10 A81
Power inverter.40 A82
Not used.—83
Driveline control module.40 A84
Rain sensor.5 A85
Not used.—86
264
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Not used.—87
Not used.—88
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
The fuse box is below the glove
compartment.
E293328
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Not used.5 A1
Not used.5 A2
Not used.10 A3
Ignition switch.10 A4
Steering column lock.
Lock.20 A5
Unlock.
DC-AC inverter.10 A6
Passenger door module.30 A7
265
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Parking assist control module.5 A8
Auto-dimming interior mirror.5 A9
Lane keeping system.
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator.
Extended power module.10 A10
Telematics control unit module.5 A11
Keyless keypad switch.5 A12
Driver door unlock.15 A13
Driver door module.30 A14
Not used (spare).15 A15
Not used (spare).15 A16
SYNC.15 A17
Receiver transceiver module.
Integrated control panel.
Wireless accessory charging module.7.5 A18
All terrain control module.
Not used (spare).7.5 A19
Not used (spare).10 A20
Not used (spare).7.5 A21
Not used (spare).7.5 A22
Not used (spare).20 A23
Not used (spare).20 A24
Not used (spare).30 A25
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
266
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
General Information
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
E253688
1. Pull the latch toward you and remove
the top cover.
E253689
2
3
2. Pull the connector lever upward.
3. Pull the connector upward to remove
it.
E253693
4. Pull both latches toward you and
remove the fuse box.
5. Turn the fuse box over and open the
lid.
267
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
268
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E263274
1. Open the left-hand front door.
2. Fully pull the hood release lever and
let it completely retract.
Note: This action releases the hood latch.
3. Fully pull the hood release lever for a
second time.
Note: This action fully releases the hood.
4. Open the hood.
Note: There is no secondary latch under the
hood.
269
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Closing the Hood
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
latch the hood before driving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
10–14 in (25–35 cm).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
E332009
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 283).A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 275).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 272).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 272).D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 279).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 280).F
Power distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 267).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 274).H
270
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
E331992
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 283).A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 275).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 272).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 272).D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 279).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 280).F
Power distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 267).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 274).H
271
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E250320
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 269).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 271).
7. Reinstall the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See Under
Hood Overview (page 271).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Engine Oil
Capacity and Specification (page
326).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
272
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 271).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Engine Oil
Capacity and Specification (page
326). You may have to use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
273
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only parts that meet or exceed our
specifications.
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 394).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E299070
1. Using a screwdriver, loosen the clamp
on the air filter housing cover.
2. Gently pull the boot back away from
the air filter housing cover.
3. Release the two clips from the air filter
housing cover.
4. Remove the air filter housing cover.
5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
E299073
7. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
8. Install the air filter housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
10. Reconnect the boot to the air filter
housing cover and tighten securely.
274
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 394).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
275
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 321).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
321).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
276
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone.
A warning lamp illuminates, and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
277
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep slope in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You could notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle could enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, slope and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may turn on and off
during severe operating conditions to
protect the engine from overheating. When
the coolant temperature decreases to the
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
278
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after
several minutes, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 394). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
Note: A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal operating
range and there is no need to add fluid. A
fluid level not in the normal operating range
could compromise the performance of the
system. Have the system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
279
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Brake Fluid Service Interval
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake
fluid. Change brake fluid at the specified
intervals to prevent degraded braking
performance.
For detailed interval information, see
Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement
is different. You must replace the battery
with one of exactly the same
specification.
280
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
The battery is in the engine compartment.
See Under Hood Overview (page 271).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free
battery. It does not require additional
water during service.
If the vehicle battery has a cover, make
sure you correctly install it after cleaning
or replacing the battery.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the
battery terminals. If any corrosion is
present on the battery or terminals, remove
the cables from the terminals and clean
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and
water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
arcing.
To maintain correct operation of the
battery management system, if you add
any electrical devices to your vehicle, do
not connect the ground connection directly
to the negative battery terminal. A
connection at the negative battery terminal
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to your vehicle this may
adversely affect battery performance,
durability and the performance of other
electrical systems on your vehicle.
If you replace the battery make sure it
matches the electrical requirements of
your vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery
and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive
strategy. Because of this, the transmission
may shift firmly when first driven. This is
normal operation while the transmission
fully updates its operation to optimum
shift feel.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered
for a period of time after you switch the
ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and
adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting
the battery without waiting can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
terminal.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
terminal.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
8. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
make sure the ignition remains switched off.
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals
are fully tightened.
281
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
battery, you must reset the following
features:
• Window bounce-back.
• Clock Settings.
• Pre-set radio stations.
• Steering Angle Sensor.
Note: To calibrate the steering angle
sensor, drive the vehicle above 30 mph
(50 km/h) for a minimum of 1.2 mi (2 km).
Make sure to drive straight ahead for a
minimum of 30 seconds. Several vehicle
functions are disabled and a warning light
could appear until the sensor is calibrated.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you could experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine, and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned. Drive
the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Battery Disposal
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, have
the alignment of your headlamps checked
by your authorized dealer.
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
center from the ground and mark an
8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp when adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
282
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
E142466
4. There is a distinct cut-off, or change
from light to dark, in the left portion of
the beam pattern. Position the top
edge of this cut-off at the horizontal
reference plane.
E321760
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise to aim
the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is non-adjustable.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
our specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
283
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE FRONT WIPER
BLADES
1. Fully lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
E264374
2. Press the wiper blade locking button.
E264375
3. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
CHANGING THE REAR WIPER
BLADES
1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
E183236
284
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
2. Disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
CHANGING A BULB
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
Headlamp bulbs are LED and are not
serviceable. See an authorized dealer if
they fail.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs
Fog lamp bulbs are LED and are not
serviceable. See an authorized dealer if
they fail.
Replacing Turn Signal Lamps
E307885
Rear direction indicator bulb.A
Side marker bulb.B
E321838
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the liftgate.
2. Gently pull the closeout panel away
from the vehicle in a rearward direction.
3. Remove the nuts from the lamp
assembly.
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle in a rearward direction.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb
socket counterclockwise. Gently pull
the bulb straight out of the socket.
7. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Replacing the Side Marker Bulbs
Side marker bulbs are LED and are not
serviceable. See an authorized dealer if
they fail.
285
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly
Bulbs
B
E321748
A
C
C
B
A
Rear directional indicator.A
Stop lamp.B
Reverse lamp.C
1. Remove the screws with a flathead
screwdriver and pull the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb by turning the lower
bulb socket counterclockwise. Gently
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Replacing License Plate Lamp
Bulbs
License plate lamps are LED and are not
serviceable. See an authorized dealer if
they fail.
Replacing High Mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs
High mount stop lamps are LED and are
not serviceable. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
286
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
287
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
288
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
Immediately rinse away any over spray.
289
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
For rubber floor:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• To remove soil use cloth dampened
with water.
Note: Do not power wash main flooring.
290
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Mirrors
Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or
instrument panel to avoid contamination
of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
291
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
292
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery
cables.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
293
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
294
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes.
Using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from what is fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from what was fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with your dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 297).
You can find the recommended tire
inflation pressures on the Tire Label, which
is on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver
door. You can also find this information on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label,
affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Notice to Utility Vehicle and Truck
Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
295
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-Wheel Drive System (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which can enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the four-wheel drive
system. If there is a significant difference
between the size of a spare and the
remaining tires, four-wheel drive
functionality could be limited or disabled.
Note: The spare tire is only intended to be
used in emergency situations. Replace the
road wheel as soon as possible as extended
use of a spare wheel can result in vehicle
wear. Ensure all four tires are matching in
manufacturer, size, and wear.
How Your Vehicle Differs from
Other Vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle can be:
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting stuck or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting stuck or
damaging underbody components. A
shorter wheelbase can make your
vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport utility vehicles and trucks
often have a higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile, also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
296
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
297
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
298
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
299
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
300
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Speed ratingLetter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
301
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
302
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
303
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
recommend the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
found on the tire. You will find a
Tire Label containing the
manufactures recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
304
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The recommended tire inflation
pressure is also found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on
the edge of the driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
305
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare
tire when you replace the road
tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been
used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
306
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver's door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated
on the sidewall of the tire to set
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
307
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
308
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Tire Rotation Diagram
E142547
309
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains
on snow-free roads.
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to
specified tires.
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted
with wheel trims, remove them before
fitting snow chains.
WARNING: If you choose to install
snow tires on your vehicle, they must be
the same size, construction, and load
range as the original tires listed on the
tire placard, and they must be installed
on all four wheels. Mixing tires of
different size or construction on your
vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may
lead to loss of vehicle control.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
• Use 10 mm cables or chains only on
front axle with 225/65R17 and
225/60R18 tires.
• Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device.
• The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
• Do not use chains or cables on
235/65R17 tires.
• Install cables securely, verifying that
the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
• Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
310
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
311
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in
this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E250820
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 98). The
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
312
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible cause
Low tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflated
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
Flashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
313
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it
may not function.
Note: Only use tire sealants in roadside
emergencies as they may cause damage to
the tire pressure monitoring system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 310). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that we provided with the
vehicle. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, replace it instead of repairing
it.
314
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
315
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and
the thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel,
place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support
as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use only the specified
jacking points. If you use other positions,
you may damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or
the fuel lines.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your
vehicle.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Park your vehicle so
that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic or place yourself in any danger and
set up a warning triangle.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
WARNING: The jack should be
used on level firm ground wherever
possible.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is only supported by a
vehicle jack.
E166722
Note: The jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the service life of your vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
3. Lift and remove the carpeted cargo
area floor to access the spare tire and
jack.
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
316
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the spare tire and jack kit from
the spare tire compartment.
6. Remove the jack and the flat tire
retainer strap from the jack base.
E323462
7. Turn the jack hex nut drive screw
counterclockwise to detach the lug
wrench from the jack. This lowers the
jack and releases the mechanical lock.
E337330
8. Unfold the lug wrench for use.
E181744
9. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E142551
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
11. The vehicle jacking points shown here
are also depicted on the warning
label on the jack. Small arrow-shaped
marks on the vehicle sills show the
location of the jacking points.
E322803
12. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise
the vehicle until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
317
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E294119
13. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Note: For vehicles with full wheel covers
with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel
nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or
damage to the wheel cover may occur.
14. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
15. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
16. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
320).
1
2
3
4
5
E306781
Stowing the flat tire
1. To store the jack kit fold the jack and
wrench handle and engage it to the
bracket of the jack base using the lug
wrench pin.
2. When attaching the folded wrench on
the jack, swing the wrench upward and
adjust the jack height until the wrench
hook engages the hole on the jack.
Tighten the hex nut clockwise until
secure.
E294121
3. Re-position the jack kit assembly into
the original vehicle position and secure
with the plastic wing nut. Make sure
the jack is fastened securely before you
drive.
4. Unblock the wheels.
318
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
cargo area. Secure with the flat tire
retainer strap by following the next
steps:
E142906
6. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
non-loop end through the loop.
E157926
7. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
8. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
opposite corner of the cargo area to
the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread
the retainer strap through the tie-down
and pull tight.
9. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
E143746
319
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 lb.ft (135 Nm)M12 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel
disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal.
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
320
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationEngine
10:1Compression ratio.
122.0 in³ (1,999 cm³)Displacement.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
Drivebelt closest to the engine.A.
Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
B.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationEngine
11:1Compression ratio.
91 in³ (1,497 cm³)Displacement.
1-2-3Firing order.
321
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationEngine
Coil on plugIgnition system.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
Drivebelt Routing
E307322
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
SpecificationDimension Description
172.7 in (4,386 mm)Overall length excluding the license plate
bracket.
74.3 in (1,888 mm)Overall width.
71.5 in (1,817 mm)Overall height.
30.4°Approach angle.
33.1°Departure angle.
20.4°Ramp breakover angle - Curb.
8.8 in (223 mm)Minimum running ground clearance.
322
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1939Air filter element.
BHEF-48H6Battery.
FP-89Cabin air filter.
FL-910-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-578
Spark plug.
2
WW-2117 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2302 (passenger side)
WW-901 (rear window)
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance.
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that
are available at your authorized dealer or
at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these
parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed
our specifications. Use of other parts could
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty could be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1939Air filter element.
BHEF-48H6Battery.
FP-89Cabin air filter.
FL-910-S
Engine oil filter.
1
323
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
SP-550
Spark plug.
2
WW-2117 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2302 (passenger side)
WW-901 (rear window)
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance.
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that
are available at your authorized dealer or
at www.fordparts.com. We engineer these
parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed
our specifications. Use of other parts could
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty could be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
The chart that follows specifies the
replacement bulbs. Use headlamp bulbs
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America to ensure lamp
performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs do not
damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and provide
quality bulb burn time.
Exterior Lamps
Trade numberFunction
W21WBackup, reverse lamp.
LED
Fog lamp.
1
LED
Front side marker.
1
LED
Headlamp.
1
LED
High-mount brake lamp.
1
LED
License plate lamp.
1
LED
Rear side marker.
1
WY16WRear turn signal lamp.
324
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Trade numberFunction
P27/7WStop lamp.
LED
Tail lamp.
1
1
To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Interior Lamps
Trade numberFunction
LED
All interior lamps.
1
1
To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Note: To replace all instrument panel lights, see your authorized dealer.
325
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
5.3 qt (5.05 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C960-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-20
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W20-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W20-LSP6(Canada)
326
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C962-A1Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-Q1SP(U.S.)
E240522
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
327
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
5.5 qt (5.2 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend
328
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
7.7 qt (7.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
329
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
8.6 qt (8.1 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
Capacities
QuantityVariant
15.7 gal (59.5 L)All.
330
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)19.4 oz (0.55 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
331
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
3.4 fl oz (100 ml)19.4 oz (0.55 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
332
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced brake performance.
Note: We recommend you use DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. If
you use any fluid other than the
recommended fluid, it could cause reduced
brake performance and not meet our
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials could result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
333
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E311767
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifier.A
Brake system, gross vehicle
weight rating, restraint devices
and their locations.
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
C
Engine or motor type.D
Check digit.E
Model year.F
Assembly plant.G
Production sequence number.H
334
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Identification
WHAT IS A CONNECTED
VEHICLE
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile
network and for you to access a range of
features. When used in conjunction with
the FordPass app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further,
for example checking the tire pressures,
the fuel level and the vehicle location. For
additional information, refer to the local
Ford website.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network.
Some remote features require additional
service activation. Log in to your Ford
account for details. Some restrictions, third
party terms and message or data rates
may apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or
regulations could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK -
VEHICLES WITH: MODEM
What Is the Modem
The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
Enabling and Disabling the Modem
1. Press Settings.
2. Press FordPass Connect.
3. Press Connectivity Settings.
4. Switch connectivity features on or off.
Connecting FordPass to the
Modem
1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
4. Select the option for vehicle details.
5. Select the option to activate your
vehicle.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your
FordPass account.
7. Confirm that FordPass account is
connected to the modem.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A WI-FI NETWORK - VEHICLES
WITH: SYNC 3
1. Press Settings.
335
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
2. Press Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Press View Available Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING - VEHICLES WITH:
MODEM
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot confirm the
connection of my FordPass
account to the modem.
– Modem is not enabled.
• Switch connectivity features on.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
336
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING - VEHICLES WITH:
SYNC 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
337
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see the Wi-Fi
hotspot name when I search
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
338
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it
for access to the Internet.
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press FordPass Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting
is on.
3. Press Settings.
4. Press Wi-Fi visibility.
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is
on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
and Password
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press FordPass Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Press Settings.
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
4. Press View Password.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and
select the hotspot from the list of
available Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your
device, open a website and it redirects
to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
portal to purchase a plan.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system
does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
to purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available
in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-
FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
PASSWORD
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Press FordPass Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Press Settings.
4. Press Edit.
5. Press Change SSID Name.
6. Enter your required SSID.
7. Press Done.
8. Press Change Password.
9. Enter your required password.
10. Press Done.
339
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E289731
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features.
340
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Adjusting the Volume
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E248947
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Muting the Audio
E285283
Press and release the button to
mute the playing audio.
Pausing or Playing Media
In media mode, press and
release the button to pause
playback. Press the button again
to resume playback.
In radio mode, press and release the button
to mute the radio. Press the button again
to unmute.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The button may be on the volume
control.
Switching the Display On and Off
E272035
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
Press and release the button to
skip to the next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press and release the button to
return to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
341
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in the category you
select.
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts, where
available, in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode, only, if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
342
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
343
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
1
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
344
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
345
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
Locating Your ESN
With satellite radio as the source, use the
touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
376).
2. Select SiriusXM.
3. Select SiriusXM information.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
346
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
USB A
E201595
USB C
E301114
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Locating the USB Ports
The USB ports may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
Note: The number and type of USB ports
may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Only the USB ports located in the
media bin have data transfer capabilities.
347
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
About SYNC
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Using the Touchscreen
E293823
Status bar.A
Home screen.B
Clock. See Settings (page 376).C
Outside air temperature.D
Feature bar.E
Status Bar
Cell phone microphone muted.
Audio system muted.
Software update installed.
Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
348
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Automatic crash notification
system off.
Cell phone network signal
strength.
Vehicle data sharing on.
Vehicle location sharing on.
Vehicle data and vehicle location
sharing on.
Wireless charger active.
Feature Bar
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a
media player or a Bluetooth
device. See Entertainment
(page 357).
E283811
Select to adjust climate settings
Select to make calls and access
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 367).
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page
368).
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page
374).
E280315
Select to adjust system settings.
See Settings (page 376).
Cleaning the Touchscreen
See Cleaning the Interior (page 290).
Updating the System
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Downloading an Update
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically
within 10 minutes.
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
349
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Switching Automatic System Updates
On
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Switch Automatic System Updates
on.
The system is now set to check for and
receive system updates when it is
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: You can use the system when a
download is in progress.
Note: If the system is disconnected from
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi
network.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
350
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
351
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse artist The Beatles" or "Browse genre
folk".
Browse ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Album ___
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Podcast ___
1
This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped)
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set the Temperature to ____
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 376).
Pair Phone
352
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309” .Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
353
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to respond to.
Reply to Message ____
You can say the contact of the most recent
message to respond.
Reply to ____
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.
Find the Nearest
<POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous
Destinations
354
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
355
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Phone Confirmation On
356
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Phone Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
E293491
Audio source. Select to choose
a different audio source.
A
Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
B
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
357
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
1
This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
358
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. We are not responsible for any such
programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
359
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
360
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide or the
Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
361
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
362
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
363
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
1
You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
CD (If Equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
364
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
365
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E285280
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 374).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
366
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Check the compatibility of your device on
the regional website.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone
and switch Bluetooth on.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Add Phone.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
Using Your Cell Phone
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to
alphabetically sort your contacts.
Change Phone
Display the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Phone Settings
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
phone.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
367
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Mute
Mute the microphone when in a call or
voice recognition session.
Text Messaging
Setting Text Message Notification
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on.
Using Text Messaging
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Apple
CarPlay.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.
2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Auto.
Switching Android Auto Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Android Auto.
2. Switch Android Auto off.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
368
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Select the navigation option on
the feature bar.
E297557
Map view menu.A
Zoom out.B
Zoom in.C
Route guidance menu.D
Destination entry menu.E
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
DescriptionItem
Enter a destination address.Search
Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Previous Destinations
Set your saved home address as your destinationHome
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Work
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Favorites
369
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination Using the Text
Entry Screen
E297558
Text entry field.A
Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
B
Information icon.C
Search.D
Keyboard settings.E
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
You can search by entering all or part of
the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City,
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do
not specify a location, the system will
use the current vehicle location. You can
specify a location by address, city, state
or zip code. For additional search support,
please visit: support.ford.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
Setting a Destination Using the Map
Screen
E297559
Re-center the map.A
Selected location.B
3D map rotation. Swipe left or
right.
C
Start route guidance.D
Destination name.E
Select the location on the map.
Select Start to begin route guidance.
Changing the Format of the Map
Display the map in one of the following
formats:
• A two-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
top of the screen.
• A two-dimensional map with north
toward the top of the screen.
• A three-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
Zoom
Display more or less detail on the map.
370
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: You can use pinch gestures to zoom
in and out. Place two fingers on the screen
and move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297560
F
A
Turn indicator. Select to hear the
last voice prompt.
A
Point of interest.B
Estimated time of arrival,
distance to destination or time
to destination.
C
Current road.D
Mute guidance prompts.E
Cancel route guidance.F
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays.
Route Guidance Menu
DescriptionMenu Item
Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.Screen View
View a full screen map when route guidance is active.Full Map
View highway exit information for your current route.Highway Exit Info
View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Turn List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Traffic List
371
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 376).Navigation Settings
View information about your current location.Where Am I?
Cancel route guidance.Cancel Route
View the entire current route on the map.View Route
View an alternative route compared to your current one.Detour
Change the order or remove waypoints.Edit Waypoints
The system determines the order of waypoints for you.Optimize Order
Go to the next screen and start the new route.Go
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted
the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and
then adjust the volume to the desired level.
Muting Guidance Prompts
Select the mute option on the
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
Note: The system mutes the next and all
future guidance prompts.
Adding Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
You can add up to five waypoints.
1. Select the search option on the map.
2. Set a destination.
3. Select Add Waypoint.
4. Select Go.
Canceling Route Guidance
Select the route guidance menu
option on the active guidance
screen.
Select Cancel Route.
E294817
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of
the main map.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
372
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores.
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
The Michelin travel guide is a service which
provides additional information about
certain places of interest, for example
restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points
of interest that have Michelin travel guide
information display a button to show you
more information. Push the button to see
the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you
can press the phone button to directly
establish a call with the selected point of
interest.
373
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
The navigation system map data may
contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
changing circumstances, sources used and
the nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
information, turn restrictions and other
road attributes may affect the determined
route and associated guidance
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership. Depending on your purchase
agreement, you might be eligible for free
Map update. You can choose to download
the Map data update onto a USB, order a
USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic
updates. To update your Map data over
Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to
a Wi-Fi access point. Map Data files are
large, so it is highly recommended to
perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
apply. For USB updates, free map update
eligibility, and other details, contact
dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United
States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539
in Mexico or visit our local website for more
information.
APPS
The system allows you interact with select
mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
the road. Voice commands, your steering
wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
touchscreen give you advanced control of
compatible mobile apps. You can also
stream your favorite music or podcasts,
share your time of arrival with friends, and
keep connected safely.
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you
check your data plan before using your
apps through the system. Using them
could result in additional charges. We also
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and
privacy policy before using their app. Make
sure that you have an active account for
apps that you want to use through the
system. Some apps will work with no
setup. Others require you to configure
some personal settings before you can use
them.
Note: For more information about available
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
Using Apps on an iOS Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 367).
2. Connect your device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable.
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
374
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if
you want to use a navigation app. When
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
Using Apps on an Android Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 367).
2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 367).
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
Note: The system searches and connects
to compatible apps that are running on your
device.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
enabled.
Using Mobile Navigation on an
Android Device
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 367).
3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
4. Select the apps option on the feature
bar.
5. Select the navigation app that you
want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: When using a navigation app, keep
your device unlocked and the app open.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
375
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
E280315
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
E268570
Once you select a tile, press the
button next to a menu item to
view an explanation of the
feature or setting.
Sound
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Clock
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings.
Bluetooth
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth on and
off and adjust the settings.
Phone
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and
manage the connected device settings.
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings.
376
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Driver Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist
features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping
System, Pedestrian Detection, and
Auto-Start-Stop.
Vehicle
Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings
like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings.
FordPass
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
settings
General
Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset
the system.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and
off.
Automatic Updates
Select this tile to adjust the automatic
update settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions,
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
Display
Select this tile to adjust display settings
like brightness and auto dim.
Charge Settings (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle
charge settings.
Voice Control
Select this tile to adjust voice control
settings like command confirmations and
displayed lists.
Navigation (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings
like map preferences and route guidance.
Multi Contour Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the position and
massage function of your multi contour
seats.
Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the lumbar
function of your seats.
Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
features when using personal profiles.
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
377
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system does not under-
stand what I am saying.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 350).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 350).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
The song or artist name may have some special char-
acters that are not being recognized by the system.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
378
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a contact
in the phonebook on my
device and calls the wrong
contact.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system does not under-
stand foreign names of
contacts in the phonebook
on my device.
– Device limitation.
• The system uses text-to-speech technology and
uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
pre-recorded human voice.
The system voice prompts
and the pronunciation of
some words does not seem
to be very accurate.
USB and Bluetooth Audio
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
379
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incorrect device settings.
• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog-
nize my device.
– Device limitation.
• Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from
my Bluetooth device.
– Incompatible device.
• Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 367).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog-
nize the music on my device.
– Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
380
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Copyright protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 357).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 376).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a
track playing on my device.
– Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS
device the audio volume is
set to maximum.
– Device limitation.
• Turn the volume down on your device
If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
in the correct order, the following information could help:
The system does not play
the tracks on my USB drive
in the correct order.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
381
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Phone
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
During a call, I can hear
excessive background noise.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone and Bluetooth on and off
and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
– System restart required.
• Restart the system. Switch the ignition off and
open the door. Close the door and lock the vehicle.
Wait until the touchscreen is off and any illumin-
ated USB ports are not illuminated. Unlock the
vehicle, switch the ignition on and try again.
I cannot download phone-
book.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 376).
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
• Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 376).
A message displays
suggesting that my phone-
book has downloaded but it
is empty or it has missing
contacts.
382
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from system and delete SYNC
from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Settings (page 376).
I cannot connect my cell
phone.
Text messaging does not
work.
– You did not switch on text message notifications.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 367).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Device message sharing is not enabled.
• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
I cannot hear text messages.
383
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot enter a street name
when I am abroad.
– Incorrect entry method.
• Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog-
nize coordinates.
– You are using the wrong coordinates format.
• Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
384
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Apps
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system cannot find any
apps.
– Incompatible device.
• You will need an Android device with OS 4.3 or
higher or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair
and connect your Android device to find AppLink
compatible apps. Connect your iOS device to a
USB port or pair and connect using Bluetooth.
I have a compatible device
and it is correctly connected
but the system still cannot
find any apps.
– AppLink compatible apps not installed on your device.
• Download and install the latest version of the app.
– AppLink compatible apps not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device,
it is correctly connected and
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any
apps.
– Apps failed to fully close.
• Restart the apps and try again.
• If you have an Android device with apps that have
an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 7.0 or higher, tap
the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device
that is correctly connected,
I have restarted my apps
and they are running but the
system still cannot find
them.
– An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
ating system could result in apps not being found.
• Switch Bluetooth off and on again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
385
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I have an iOS device that is
correctly connected, I have
restarted my apps and they
are running but the system
still cannot find them.
– Cable connection issue.
• Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
moment and then connect it again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
I have an Android device
running a media app which
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
– Device volume is low.
• Turn the volume up on your device.
I have an Android device
running a number of
compatible apps but the
system cannot find all of
them.
– Device limitation. Some Android devices have a limited
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to
connect. If you have more apps running on your device
than the number of available Bluetooth ports, the
system cannot find all of them.
• Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
those that you want to use.
386
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Connectivity
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
387
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see SYNC when I
search for Wi-Fi networks on
my cell phone or other
device.
– System limitation.
• SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You have not set up Personal Profiles.
I cannot create a profile.
You entered an invalid profile.
You did not select a memory button when prompted.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You did not select the lock button on the remote control.
I cannot link a remote
control.
The remote control selected was already associated with
another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
388
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You are using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do
not save.
A different personal profile is active.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You did not create a personal profile.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You did not link the memory button you are using to a
profile.
You did not link the remote control you are using to a
profile.
You are using the wrong remote control.
You are pressing a button other than the unlock or remote
start on a linked remote control.
You deleted the personal profile.
You switched the personal profiles off.My preset positions recall,
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a remote control.
You erased and reprogrammed the remote controls. This
could happen if you let a dealership add a new remote
control to replace a lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Someone performed a master reset without your know-
ledge.
389
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Resetting the System
1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
390
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Ford Licensed Accessories are the
accessory manufacturer's designs. The
manufacturer develops and therefore
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited
warranty details, and request a copy of the
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
391
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
392
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
393
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor system, a message appears in the
information display at the proper oil
change interval. This interval may be up to
one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
394
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 273).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals,
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
We have recommended maintenance
intervals for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering testing.
We rely upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you. We
recommend against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and our Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives
and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives
not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires, including spare, for wear and proper pressure.
395
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary, or if indicated by the information display.
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
396
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires, including spare, for wear and proper
pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2
If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date
on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
397
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Extended engine idling
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant level/strength and the hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints.
398
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every 3 Years
1
Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time for the
interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
2
Change the automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
3
Replace the timing belt (1.5L engine).
Change the engine coolant.
4
At 200,000 mi
(322,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3
If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
4
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every five years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
399
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform
the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.
1
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
400
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1
This is an optional feature.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace cabin air filter.
1
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1
This is an optional feature.
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
401
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
The normal oil change interval for vehicles
operating in the Middle East, North Africa,
Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil
of SM or SN quality is 3,000 mi
(5,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
402
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car/SUV
E239120
403
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
404
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
405
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
406
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
407
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
408
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
409
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
410
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
411
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
412
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’ s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
413
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
414
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
415
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
416
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
417
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
418
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
419
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
420
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
421
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
422
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
423
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
424
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
425
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
426
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
427
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
428
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
429
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
430
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Radio Frequency Statement
IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version
216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0
216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1
216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
These devices comply with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. The device does not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device accepts any interference
received, including interference that
could cause undesired operation.
431
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
Argentina
E337180
Brazil
E340204
European Union EU
E310043
Ghana
E269695
Malaysia
E269697
Paraguay
E337181
432
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
South Africa
E269696
United Arab Emirates
E269694
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
IC: 4135A-SRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vietnam
E269693
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Body Control Module
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: LXPP004
IC: 2298A-P004
433
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Cruise Control Module
Argentina
E308030
Brazil
E340118
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0065TR
IC: 3432A-0065TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
434
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: N5F-A08TAA
IC: 3248A-A08TAA
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Anti-Theft System
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: OUC26006559
IC: 850K-26006559
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Key
Argentina
E340119
E340316
435
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Brazil
E340120
E340121
02445-16-01821
02445-16-01821
Djibouti
E340306
Ghana
E340307
E340317
Jamaica
E340215
E340308
E340318
436
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Jordan
E340309
Malaysia
E339836
F17000176
Mauritania
E340310
Moldova
E337971
Morocco
E340311
Pakistan
E337974
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
437
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Serbia
E269681
Singapore
E340312
South Africa
E340313
TA-2016/2012
South Korea
E339675
MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
Taiwan
E340217
E340216
438
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
South Korea
E339675
MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E)
E340314
E340319
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C931423
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vietnam
E278262
439
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Zambia
E340315
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC3.2
Argentina
E339829
Brazil
E339830
China
CMIIT ID: 2017AJ4997
Djibouti
E339941
European Union EU
E310043
Ghana
NCA APPROVED: BR3-1M-GE2-04F
440
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Malaysia
E339836
RBAB/57H/0318/S(18-0624)
Morocco
E339942
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2017-12-I-0000413
Serbia
E339831
Singapore
E339943
South Africa
E339832
441
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
South Korea
E339675
MSIP-CMM-pAs-FA-170-BCAR-HS
Taiwan
E339833
Ukraine
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA
REGISTERED No. ER61783/18
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH
IC: 216B-FG185SG32MH
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vietnam
E339834
442
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Zambia
E339835
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Radio Transceiver Module
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: FO1-TR903BDA
IC: FO1-TR903BDA
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Telematics Control Unit
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: LHJ-FB40ND1
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s)
Argentina
E207816
443
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Brazil
E338207
China
CMIIT ID:2014DJ1923
European Union EU
E338208
Ghana
E253824
Jamaica
E338209
Jordan
E253823
Malaysia
E253822
Mexico
E253812
E338210
444
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Moldova
E197811
Morocco
E207821
Oman
E253817
Paraguay
E338211
Philippines
E198001
Russia
E253816
445
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
Serbia
E197844
Singapore
E253820
South Africa
E198002
South Korea
E253819
Taiwan
E203679
E338215
Ukraine
E253818
446
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
United Arab Emirates
E207817
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: MRXAG2SZ3
FCC ID: MRXAG2SZ4
IC: 2546A- AG2SZ3
IC: 2546A- AG2SZ4
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Wireless Accessory Charging
Module
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: L2C0066T
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
447
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Appendices
448
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
1
180 Degree Camera....................................190
Camera Views.......................................................191
Using the System................................................191
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................170
9
911 Assist.............................................................51
A
A/C
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC)...............................................................120
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC)...............................................................124
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................128
About This Manual...........................................9
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................174
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................174
Accessories.....................................................391
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................16
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................194
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting............................................203
Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators....................................................200
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators..........................................................201
Lane Centering Indicators..............................200
Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations...................................................195
Lane Centering Limitations.............................197
Sensor Limitations.............................................195
Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions..................................................194
Hilly Condition Usage........................................195
Lane Centering Precautions...........................195
When Following a Vehicle...............................195
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting........................................203
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages.........................................................203
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................282
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................283
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................282
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Divider............................................................231
Divider Position...................................................232
Folded Shelf Position........................................231
Full Shelf Position...............................................231
Storage Position.................................................232
Table Position.......................................................231
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Load Floor.....................................................231
Adjusting the Set Speed
Tolerance.....................................................203
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................73
Airbag Disposal..............................................50
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC)...............................................................120
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC)...............................................................124
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................128
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™...........331
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™.........332
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............274
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm..........................................71
Ambient Lighting...........................................84
Adjusting the Brightness...................................84
Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................84
Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................84
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................71
Arming the Alarm.................................................72
449
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Disarming the Alarm............................................72
Appendices...................................................403
Apps..................................................................374
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................375
Using Apps on an Android Device................375
Using Apps on an iOS Device........................374
Using Mobile Navigation on an Android
Device................................................................375
At a Glance.......................................................20
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............97
Headlamps On Warning Chime......................97
Key in Ignition Warning Chime.........................97
Keyless Warning Alert.........................................97
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................97
Audio Control...................................................73
You can operate the following functions
with the control:...............................................73
Audio System...............................................340
General Information.........................................340
Audio Unit......................................................340
Adjusting the Volume........................................341
Changing Radio Stations.................................341
Muting the Audio................................................341
Pausing or Playing Media................................341
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........341
Switching the Display On and Off................341
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse..............................................................341
Auto Hold..........................................................177
Auto Hold Indicator............................................178
Switching Auto Hold On and Off...................177
Using Auto Hold..................................................178
Autolamps.......................................................80
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................80
Automatic High Beam Control.................85
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators.......................................................85
Automatic Transmission...........................165
Automatic Return to park...............................166
Drive (D)................................................................166
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow..................................................................169
Low(L)....................................................................166
Manual (M)...........................................................166
Manual Park Release.........................................167
Neutral (N)...........................................................166
Park (P)..................................................................165
Reverse (R)...........................................................166
SelectShift............................................................166
Stay in Neutral Mode.........................................167
Understanding the Shift Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................165
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................279
Auto Mode.......................................................122
Auto Mode Indicators........................................122
Switching Auto Mode On and Off................122
Switching Dual Mode On and Off ................123
Auto-Start-Stop............................................152
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................153
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...............................152
Autowipers........................................................76
Autowipers Settings.............................................77
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................280
Blind Spot Information System..............210
Blind Spot Information System
Indicator..............................................................211
Blind Spot Information System Information
Messages..........................................................212
Blind Spot Information System
Sensors...............................................................211
Switching the Blind Spot Information
System On and Off.........................................211
Using the Blind Spot Information
System................................................................211
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System...........210
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........269
Booster Seats..................................................28
Types of Booster Seats......................................29
Brake Fluid Check........................................279
Brake Fluid Service Interval...........................280
Brake Fluid Specification..........................333
Brakes................................................................174
General Information...........................................174
Breaking-In.....................................................246
Brakes and Clutch.............................................246
Tires........................................................................246
Bulb Specification Chart...........................324
450
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
C
Canceling the Set Speed...........................183
Capacities and Specifications.................321
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................288
Catalytic Converter......................................162
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................163
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................163
Changing a Bulb...........................................285
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs............................285
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs...........................285
Replacing High Mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs.................................................................286
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs........286
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly
Bulbs.................................................................286
Replacing the Side Marker Bulbs................285
Replacing Turn Signal Lamps.......................285
Changing a Fuse...........................................267
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................267
Fuse Types...........................................................268
General Information..........................................267
Changing a Road Wheel............................314
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................314
Tire Change Procedure.....................................315
Changing the 12V Battery.........................280
Remove and Reinstall the Battery...............281
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................274
Changing the Front Wiper Blades.........284
Changing the Rear Wiper Blades..........284
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password..................................339
Charging a Wireless Device.......................143
Checking MyKey System Status................61
MyKey Distance.....................................................61
Number of Admin Keys......................................62
Number of MyKeys..............................................62
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................284
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................40
Child Restraint Positioning.........................30
Child Safety.......................................................21
General Information.............................................21
Child Safety Locks..........................................32
Left-Hand Side......................................................33
Right-Hand Side...................................................33
Cleaning Products.......................................287
Materials................................................................287
Cleaning the Engine...................................289
Cleaning the Exterior..................................288
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions..............288
Cleaning the Headlamps................................288
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................288
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................288
Stripes or Graphics...........................................288
Underbody...........................................................289
Under Hood.........................................................289
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................291
Cleaning the Interior...................................290
Mirrors.....................................................................291
Cleaning the Wheels..................................292
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................290
Clearing All MyKeys........................................61
Climate Control.............................................120
Auto Mode.............................................................122
Climate Control – Troubleshooting.............123
Climate Control – Troubleshooting.......123
Climate Control – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................123
Closing the Liftgate.......................................69
Closing the Liftgate From Outside Your
Vehicle.................................................................69
Connected Vehicle......................................335
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Network
- Vehicles With: Modem.............................335
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............335
Connected Vehicle Requirements.........335
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Vehicles With: Modem............................336
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Vehicles With: SYNC 3.............................337
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network - Vehicles With:
Modem.........................................................335
Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........335
Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........335
What Is the Modem..........................................335
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network - Vehicles With: SYNC
3.......................................................................335
451
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................275
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™..........329
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™........330
Cornering Lamps............................................82
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......49
Creating a MyKey...........................................60
Programming and Changing Configurable
Settings................................................................61
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........339
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot............................................................339
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password.........................................................339
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................212
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When Trailer
is Attached.......................................................214
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator............................214
Cross Traffic Alert Information
Messages..........................................................215
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations........................................................214
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors..............214
Switching the System On and Off................214
Using Cross Traffic Alert...................................212
Cruise Control................................................192
Cruise Control Indicators...........................193
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control.............................................................74
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Lane
Centering........................................................74
Cup Holders....................................................145
Cup Holder Precautions...................................145
Customer Assistance.................................253
D
Data Recording..................................................11
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment
Data.......................................................................13
Event Data................................................................13
Service Data............................................................12
Services That Third Parties Provide...............14
Services That We Provide..................................14
Vehicles With a Modem......................................14
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System..................................................................15
Vehicles With SYNC.............................................14
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps...............................................................81
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).............81
Declaration of Conformity.........................431
Radio Frequency Statement..........................431
Digital Radio..................................................342
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................343
Directing the Flow of Air.............................122
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents........122
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air
Vents...................................................................122
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents...................................................................122
Direction Indicators.......................................83
Direction Indicator...............................................83
Switching the Direction Indicators On and
Off.........................................................................83
Doors and Locks.............................................64
Drive Mode Control......................................222
Drive Modes..........................................................223
Drive Modes...................................................223
Eco...........................................................................223
Mud/Ruts..............................................................223
Normal...................................................................223
Rock Crawl............................................................223
Sand........................................................................224
Slippery..................................................................224
Sport.......................................................................224
Driver Alert.....................................................205
Using Driver Alert...............................................205
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................43
Children and Airbags..........................................44
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................43
Driver Knee Airbag..........................................47
Driving Aids....................................................205
Driving Economically..................................246
Driving Hints..................................................239
Off-Road Driving................................................239
452
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps.....81
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).................81
E
Electric Parking Brake..................................175
Applying the Electric Parking Brake.............175
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake...................................................176
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake...................................................................175
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge................................................................176
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............403
Emergency Call Limitations.......................52
Emergency Call Requirements..................51
Emission Law..................................................161
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance..........162
Tampering With a Noise Control
System................................................................161
Enabling Remote Start................................117
End User License Agreement.................406
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................406
Engine Block Heater....................................150
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................151
Engine Coolant Check................................275
Adding Coolant...................................................275
Coolant Change..................................................277
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................278
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................277
Recycled Coolant...............................................276
Severe Climates..................................................277
Engine Emission Control.............................161
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................71
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
1.5L EcoBoost™........................................326
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................327
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.0L EcoBoost™........................................327
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................328
Engine Oil Check...........................................272
Adding Engine Oil...............................................272
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................272
Engine Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................321
Drivebelt Routing...............................................322
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................321
Drivebelt Routing................................................321
Entertainment...............................................357
AM/FM Radio......................................................358
Apps.......................................................................366
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................365
CD............................................................................364
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available).........................................................361
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)........................................................359
Sources..................................................................357
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................366
USB Ports.............................................................366
Environment.....................................................19
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................175
Essential Towing Checks..........................235
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................237
Hitches...................................................................236
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................237
Safety Chains......................................................236
Trailer Brakes.......................................................236
Trailer Lamps.......................................................237
Trailer Towing Connector................................236
When Towing a Trailer......................................237
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................11
Export Unique Options.................................18
Extending the Remote Start
Duration..........................................................117
Exterior Mirrors................................................88
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................89
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................89
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................88
453
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................89
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................35
How to Extract Seatbelts in the Rear
Outermost Positions......................................37
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................36
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................35
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................314
Floor Mats......................................................246
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................81
Ford Credit.........................................................15
US Only.....................................................................15
Ford Protect...................................................392
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................393
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................392
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................170
Principle of Operation.......................................170
Front Fog Lamps.............................................81
Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................82
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or
Off..........................................................................81
Front Passenger Sensing System............44
Front Wiper Blades
See: Changing the Front Wiper Blades......284
Fuel and Refueling.......................................154
Fuel Consumption.......................................159
Advertised Capacity..........................................159
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................159
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................155
Fuel Filter........................................................283
Fuel Quality....................................................154
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................154
Fuel Shutoff...................................................249
Fuel Tank Capacity.....................................330
Fuse Box Locations....................................260
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................260
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........260
Fuses................................................................260
Fuse Specification Chart..........................260
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................260
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........265
G
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen........91
4 Inch Display.........................................................91
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............91
Fuel Gauge..............................................................92
Gauges - Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display
Screen..............................................................92
Distance to Empty...............................................93
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............93
Fuel Gauge..............................................................93
Information Bar.....................................................93
Information Display.............................................93
Low Fuel Reminder..............................................93
Gearbox
See: Transmission..............................................165
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................53
Intelligent Access.................................................53
General Maintenance Information.......394
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................396
Owner Checks and Services..........................395
Protecting Your Investment...........................394
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................394
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................394
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................256
Getting the Services You Need...............253
Away From Home..............................................253
Glasses Holder...............................................145
Locating the Glasses Holder..........................145
Global Opening and Closing.....................88
Closing the Windows.........................................88
Opening the Windows.......................................88
H
Hazard Flashers...........................................249
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................282
Headlamp Exit Delay...................................80
Headrest
See: Head Restraints.........................................132
Head Restraints.............................................132
Folding the Head Restraint.............................134
454
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Front Seat Head Restraints.............................133
Installing the Head Restraint.........................134
Lowering the Head Restraint..........................133
Raising the Head Restraint.............................133
Removing the Head Restraint........................134
Removing the Head Restraints......................133
Tilting the Front Seat Head Restraint.........134
Heated Seats.................................................138
Heating
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC)...............................................................120
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC)...............................................................124
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................128
Hill Start Assist..............................................176
Switching the System On and Off................177
Using Hill Start Assist........................................177
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................174
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........269
Horn.....................................................................74
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work.....................................194
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work...............................................139
I
Identifying the Climate Control
Unit.................................................................120
Ignition Switch...............................................147
In California (U.S. Only)............................254
Information Display Control.......................74
Information Displays....................................98
General Information...........................................98
Information Messages................................103
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................103
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control.........104
Alarm......................................................................104
Auto-Start-Stop.................................................104
Battery and Charging System........................105
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System....................................................106
Doors and Locks.................................................106
Driver Alert.............................................................107
Four-Wheel Drive................................................107
Fuel..........................................................................108
Hill Start Assist...................................................108
Keys and Intelligent Access............................108
Lane Keeping System.......................................109
Maintenance.........................................................110
MyKey........................................................................111
Park Aid....................................................................112
Park Brake...............................................................112
Power Steering.....................................................113
Pre-Collision Assist.............................................113
Remote Start.........................................................113
Seats.........................................................................114
Starting System ...................................................114
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................114
Trailer........................................................................115
Transmission.........................................................115
Installing Child Restraints...........................23
Child Restraints.....................................................23
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................23
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................25
Using Tether Straps.............................................27
Instrument Cluster..........................................91
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................80
Instrument Panel...........................................20
Interior Air Quality..........................................131
Interior Lamps.................................................83
Interior Lamp Function......................................83
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off.........................................................................83
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On........83
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and
Off.........................................................................83
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and
Off.........................................................................84
Interior Mirror...................................................89
Automatic Dimming Mirror..............................89
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................89
Introduction........................................................9
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................250
To Connect the Booster Cables...................250
To Start the Engine.............................................251
455
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
K
Keyless Entry....................................................67
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................67
Keyless Starting.............................................147
Ignition Modes.....................................................148
Keys and Remote Controls.........................53
L
Lane Keeping System................................206
Switching the System On and Off...............207
Liftgate...............................................................69
Closing the Liftgate.............................................69
Opening the Liftgate...........................................69
Lighting Control..............................................79
Flashing High Beam Headlamps...................80
Lighting Control Selections..............................79
Switching High Beam Headlamps On and
Off.........................................................................79
Lighting...............................................................79
General Information............................................79
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............225
Load Carrying................................................225
Load Limit.......................................................225
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................229
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................225
Locating the Cabin Air Filter......................131
Locating the Power Outlet.........................141
Locating the Wireless Accessory
Charger..........................................................143
Locking and Unlocking................................64
Activating Intelligent Access...........................64
Autolock..................................................................66
Battery Saver.........................................................66
Illuminated Entry..................................................66
Illuminated Exit.....................................................66
Opening a Rear Door from the Inside...........64
Power Door Locks................................................64
Remote Control....................................................64
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................65
Smart Unlocks for Passive keys......................65
Luggage Compartment..............................231
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................314
M
Maintenance.................................................269
General Information.........................................269
Manual Seats.................................................135
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................135
Adjusting the Seat Height...............................135
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................135
Map Pocket.....................................................145
Locating the Map Pocket.................................145
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................98
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors................................87
Mobile Communications Equipment.......17
Moonroof..........................................................90
Bounce-Back.........................................................90
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............90
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................323
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................323
MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................62
MyKey™.............................................................59
Principle of Operation........................................59
N
Navigation......................................................368
Changing the Format of the Map................370
cityseeker..............................................................372
Michelin Travel Guide.......................................373
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates............................................................374
Route Guidance...................................................371
Setting a Destination.......................................369
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................373
Zoom......................................................................370
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........397
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™.........................397
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................398
456
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
O
Off-Road Driving..........................................239
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-Road...........245
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques............239
Driving Off-Road................................................240
Driving Through Water Limitations.............244
Off-Road Driving Aids......................................244
Off-Road Driving Precautions.......................239
What Is Off-Road Driving...............................239
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................273
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................272
Opening and Closing the Hood..............269
Closing the Hood...............................................270
Opening the Hood.............................................269
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
Window...........................................................70
Opening the Liftgate.....................................69
Opening the Liftgate From Outside Your
Vehicle.................................................................69
Opening the Liftgate Using the Remote
Control................................................................69
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................258
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........258
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control............................................................86
Overriding the Set Speed.........................200
P
Parking Aids....................................................185
Principle of Operation.......................................185
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................71
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key..........................................................................71
SecuriLock®............................................................71
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................71
Perchlorate........................................................15
Personalized Settings.................................102
Fuel Economy......................................................102
Trip 1 and 2............................................................103
Personal Safety System™...........................41
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................41
Phone...............................................................367
Android Auto.......................................................368
Apple CarPlay.....................................................368
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................367
Text Messaging..................................................368
Using Your Cell Phone......................................367
Post-Crash Alert System...........................251
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................64
Power Outlet Indicators.............................142
Power Outlet...................................................141
Power Outlet Precautions - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................142
Power Outlet Precautions - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................142
Power Outlet Precautions..........................141
Power Seats...................................................136
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................136
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................136
Adjusting the Seat Height...............................136
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................136
Power Steering Fluid Check....................280
Power Windows..............................................87
Accessory Delay...................................................88
Bounce-Back.........................................................87
One-Touch Down.................................................87
One-Touch Up.......................................................87
Rear Window Lock...............................................87
Pre-Collision Assist......................................217
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................220
Blocked Sensors................................................220
Distance Indication and Alert.........................219
Evasive Steering Assist.....................................219
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System...............................................................218
Protecting the Environment........................19
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................314
R
Rear Floodlamps............................................84
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings.......................................................140
457
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Rear Occupant Alert System
Indicators......................................................140
Rear Occupant Alert System
Limitations...................................................139
Rear Occupant Alert System
Precautions..................................................139
Rear Occupant Alert System...................139
Rear Parking Aid...........................................186
Object Distance Indicator................................187
Rear Seats........................................................137
Folding the Seat Backrest................................137
Unfolding the Seat Backrest..........................138
Rear View Camera........................................187
Using the Rear View Camera System.........188
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................187
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........78
Rear Camera Washer..........................................78
Rear Window Washer.........................................78
Rear Window Wiper.............................................78
Rear Wiper Blades
See: Changing the Rear Wiper Blades.......284
Recommended Towing Weights...........234
Refueling..........................................................157
Refueling System Overview............................157
Refueling System Warning.............................158
Refueling Your Vehicle.......................................157
Remote Control..............................................53
Car Finder................................................................57
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53
Passive Key.............................................................54
Replacing the Battery.........................................55
Sounding a Panic Alarm.....................................57
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle.............................................................117
Remotely Starting the Vehicle........................117
Remotely Stopping the Vehicle......................117
Remote Start Limitations...........................117
Remote Start Precautions..........................117
Remote Start Remote Control
Indicators.......................................................118
Remote Control Feedback...............................118
Remote Start...................................................117
Remote Start Settings.......................................118
Remote Start Settings.................................118
Setting the Remote Start Duration...............119
Switching Climate Control Auto Mode On
and Off................................................................118
Switching Climate Control Last Settings
On and Off........................................................118
Switching the Heated Seat Settings On and
Off........................................................................118
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
Settings On and Off.......................................118
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............292
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................16
Collision Repairs....................................................16
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................16
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................16
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................58
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter....................131
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................258
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................258
Resuming the Set Speed...........................193
Resuming the Set Speed from a Complete
Stop...................................................................200
Roadside Assistance..................................248
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................249
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................248
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................248
Roadside Emergencies..............................248
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................225
Maximum Roof Load Amounts....................225
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................246
Running Out of Fuel.....................................155
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................156
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................155
S
Safety Canopy™............................................48
Safety Precautions......................................154
Satellite Radio..............................................344
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................345
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............345
458
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................345
Troubleshooting.................................................346
Scheduled Maintenance..........................394
Seatbelt Extensions......................................40
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................37
Seatbelt Reminder........................................38
Seatbelt Status.....................................................39
Seatbelts...........................................................34
Principle of Operation........................................34
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................38
Conditions of operation.....................................38
Seats..................................................................132
Security................................................................71
Selecting a Drive Mode - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................222
Selecting a Drive Mode - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................223
Settings............................................................376
911 Assist................................................................377
Ambient Lighting................................................377
Audio.......................................................................376
Automatic Updates...........................................377
Bluetooth..............................................................376
Charge Settings...................................................377
Clock.......................................................................376
Display....................................................................377
Driver Assist..........................................................377
FordPass................................................................377
General...................................................................377
Message Center..................................................377
Mobile Apps..........................................................377
Multi Contour Seats...........................................377
Navigation.............................................................377
Personal Profiles.................................................377
Phone.....................................................................376
Seats.......................................................................377
Sound.....................................................................376
Valet Mode............................................................377
Vehicle....................................................................377
Voice Control........................................................377
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Gap.................................................................199
Following a Vehicle............................................199
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed............................................................198
Manually Changing the Set Speed..............198
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed from a
Complete Stop...............................................198
Setting the Blower Motor Speed.............121
Setting the Cruise Control Speed...........192
Changing the Set Speed..................................192
Setting the Temperature.............................121
Setting the Trail Control Speed...............182
Side Airbags.....................................................46
Sitting in the Correct Position..................132
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................310
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................314
Special Notices................................................16
New Vehicle Limited Warranty........................16
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles.........................................17
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................17
Special Instructions.............................................16
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance.............17
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............17
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................400
Exceptions............................................................401
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................192
Speed Sign Recognition.............................215
Principle of Operation.......................................215
Using Speed Sign Recognition......................216
Stability Control...........................................180
Principle of Operation......................................180
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................148
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................149
Failure to Start.....................................................149
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...............150
Important Ventilating Information..............150
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................150
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................150
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................148
Vehicles with Keyless Start............................148
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........147
General Information...........................................147
459
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Steering.............................................................217
Electric Power Steering.....................................217
Steering Wheel................................................73
Storage.............................................................145
Cup Holders..........................................................145
Glasses Holder.....................................................145
Map Pocket...........................................................145
Under Seat Storage...........................................145
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................90
Sun Visors.........................................................89
Illuminated Vanity Mirror..................................90
Supplementary Restraints System.........42
Principle of Operation.........................................42
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off...........................................................197
Automatic Cancellation or
Deactivation....................................................198
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................198
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................198
Switching Air Conditioning On and
Off...................................................................120
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.....................................................85
Activating the Automatic High Beam
Control................................................................85
Switching Climate Control On and
Off...................................................................120
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off...................................................................192
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................192
Switching Cruise Control On..........................192
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control........................................201
Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Off..................................................................202
Changing the Set Speed with Intelligent
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................203
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off...................................................................201
Activating Lane Centering..............................202
System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation...................................................202
Switching Maximum Cooling On and
Off...................................................................120
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off...................................................................120
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off...................................................139
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off...................................................................120
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and
Off.....................................................................121
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off............................................................121
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off......................................................75
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and
Off.....................................................................121
Switching Trail Control On and Off........182
Symbols Glossary.............................................9
SYNC™ 3........................................................348
General Information.........................................348
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................378
Additional Information and
Assistance.......................................................390
Apps.......................................................................385
Navigation............................................................384
Personal Profiles...............................................388
Phone.....................................................................382
Resetting the System......................................390
USB and Bluetooth Audio..............................379
Voice Recognition..............................................378
Wi-Fi Connectivity.............................................387
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............321
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................255
Tire Care..........................................................297
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................298
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................297
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................299
Temperature A B C............................................298
Traction AA A B C...............................................297
Treadwear.............................................................297
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........310
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................312
460
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .......................................312
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................295
Towing a Trailer.............................................233
Load Placement.................................................233
Towing Points................................................252
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels..........................................................238
Emergency Towing............................................238
Recreational Towing - All-Wheel and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles........................238
Recreational Towing - Front-Wheel Drive
Vehicles............................................................238
Recreational Towing - Rear-Wheel Drive
Vehicles............................................................238
Towing..............................................................233
Traction Control.............................................179
Principle of Operation.......................................179
Trail Control Indicators...............................183
Trail Control....................................................182
Trail Control – Troubleshooting....................184
Trail Control – Troubleshooting..............184
Trail Control – Information
Messages..........................................................184
Trailer Sway Control...................................234
Transmission..................................................165
Transporting the Vehicle............................251
Type Approvals.............................................432
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind
Spot Information System..........................432
Radio Frequency Certifications for Body
Control Module..............................................433
Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise
Control Module..............................................434
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.............435
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Anti-Theft System........................................435
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Key......................................................................435
Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio
Transceiver Module......................................443
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC3.2...........................................................440
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Telematics Control Unit.............................443
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)...............443
Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless
Accessory Charging Module.....................447
U
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™...................................................271
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................270
Under Seat Storage.....................................145
Locating the Under Seat Storage
Compartment.................................................145
Unique Driving Characteristics................152
USB Port..........................................................347
Locating the USB Ports...................................347
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................170
Driving in Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive............................................171
Four-Wheel Drive Lock......................................172
Maintenance and Modifications....................173
Rear Differential Lock........................................172
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................62
Using Snow Chains......................................310
Using Stability Control................................181
Using Traction Control................................179
Switching the System Off................................179
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................179
Using a Switch.....................................................179
Using the Information Display
Controls.............................................................179
Using Voice Recognition...........................350
Audio Voice Commands..................................351
Climate Voice Commands.............................352
Mobile App Voice Commands......................355
Navigation Voice Commands.......................354
Phone Voice Commands................................352
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................356
Voice Settings Commands............................356
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................256
461
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
V
Vehicle Care...................................................287
General Information..........................................287
Vehicle Dimensions.....................................322
Vehicle Identification Number................334
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number.............................................................334
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview..........................................................334
Vehicle Identification.................................334
Vehicle Identification Number......................334
Vehicle Storage.............................................292
Body........................................................................292
Brakes....................................................................293
Cooling system...................................................293
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery.............293
Engine....................................................................293
Fuel system..........................................................293
General..................................................................292
Miscellaneous.....................................................293
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................293
Tires........................................................................293
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot................................339
Ventilation
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC)...............................................................120
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC)...............................................................124
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Temperature Control....................................128
Voice Control....................................................74
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................94
4WD Lock................................................................97
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................94
Anti-Lock Braking System................................94
Auto Hold Active..................................................94
Auto Hold Unavailable.......................................94
Automatic High Beam Control.......................94
Auto-Start-Stop...................................................94
Battery......................................................................94
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................94
Brake System Warning Lamp..........................95
Cruise Control........................................................95
Direction Indicator...............................................95
Door Ajar..................................................................95
Electric Park Brake...............................................95
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp....................................................................95
Engine Oil................................................................95
Fasten Rear Seatbelt..........................................96
Fasten Seatbelt....................................................95
Front Airbag...........................................................96
Front Fog Lamps..................................................96
High Beam..............................................................96
Hood Ajar................................................................96
Lamps On...............................................................96
Liftgate Ajar............................................................96
Low Beam Warning.............................................96
Low Fuel Level......................................................96
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................96
Low Washer Fluid................................................96
Powertrain Fault...................................................96
Rear Differential Lock.........................................96
Service Engine Soon............................................97
Stability Control....................................................97
Stability Control Off............................................97
Trail Control............................................................97
Washer Fluid Check....................................283
Washer Fluid Specification......................332
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................288
See: Wipers and Washers.................................76
Waxing.............................................................289
What Is 911 Assist............................................51
What Is a Connected Vehicle..................335
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Lane Centering...........................................194
What Is Automatic High Beam
Control............................................................85
What Is Cruise Control................................192
Requirements.......................................................192
What Is Drive Mode Control.....................222
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control...........................................................194
What Is Remote Start...................................117
What Is the Cabin Air Filter........................131
What Is the Power Outlet...........................141
What is the Rear Occupant Alert
System...........................................................139
462
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger..........................................................143
What Is Trail Control....................................182
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................314
Wheels and Tires.........................................295
General Information.........................................295
Technical Specifications.................................320
Windows and Mirrors....................................87
Windshield Washers......................................77
Front Camera Washer........................................78
Windshield Wipers.........................................76
Intermittent Wipe.................................................76
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................76
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades.................284
Wipers and Washers.....................................76
Wireless Accessory Charger
Precautions..................................................143
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................143
463
Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202007, First-Printing
Index
